Home

Owner`s Manual

1. Hexadecimal Command Page Code and Operands Command Name 1B 26 3 c1 c2 dn Define User Defined Characters 128 1B 27 m a0 al a2 Write to User Data Storage 200 d1 dm 1B 2A m nl n2 Select Bit Image Mode 143 d1 dn 1B 2D n Select or Cancel Underline Mode 130 1B 32 Set Line Spacing to 1 6 Inch 109 1B 33 7 Set Line Spacing 109 1B 34 m a0 al a2 Read from User Data Storage 201 1B 3A 30 30 30 Copy Character Set from ROM to RAM 130 1B 3C Return Home 93 1B3Dn Select Peripheral Device For Multi Drop 93 1B 3F n Cancel User defined Characters 131 1B 40 Initialize Printer 94 1B 43 7 Set Slip Paper Eject Length 94 1B 44 n k 00 Set Horizontal Tabs 116 1B45n Select or Cancel Emphasized Mode 131 1B 47 Select Double Strike 7156 Emulation 132 1B 48 Cancel Double Strike 133 1B 49 n Set or Cancel Italic Print 133 1B4An Print and Feed Paper 110 1B 4B n Print and Reverse Feed Paper 110 1B 4C Select Page Mode 183 1B 4C n1 n2 d1 dn Select Double Density Graphics 146 7156 Emulation 1B52n Select International Character Set 134 1B 53 Select Standard Mode 184 1B54n Select Print Direction in Page Mode 185 1B55n Select or Cancel Unidirectional Printing Mode 135 1B56n Select or Cancel 90 Degrees Clockwise Rotated 135 1B 57 n1 n2 n8 Set Printing Area in Page Mode 186 1B 59 n1 n2 d1 dn Select Double Density Graphics 146 1B5B7D Switch to Flash Download Mode
2. C Display a list of all the drivers in a specific location so you can select the driver you want Seen Add New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for new drivers in its driver database on your hard drive and in any of the following selected locations Click Next to start the search Floppy disk drives v CD ROM drive Microsoft Windows Update lt Back Cancel 24 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Update Device Driver Wizard Note Location of the IONetworks files on the CD ROM may very depending on the version of the CD that is being used November 2002 25 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Add New Hardware Wizard Also verify that you have the Windows 98 USB Hot Patch ID Q236934 created 08 Jul 1999 and modified 10Aug 1999 installed To verify if this hot patch is installed check file c Windows System32 Drivers usbhub sys This file should be dated 08 13 99 size 36 672 version 4 10 22223 26 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Windows NT The printer beeps when it is plugged in to show the USB device is recognized Click on the file you downloaded and follow the on screen instructions Inside Out Networks Edgeport Drivers Setup x Inside Out Networks Edgeport Drivers Install Inside Out Networks
3. CSAC EH S Wire CO FHP YSF FP RF SRR ID FO O OCODBAAXK 1t iz DO WANE EE TIS TANNA R E0 a 3 xXa2223825 Vpu797 A240 AFF FO z gt 40 AGF 50 A640 F 70 50 80 60 90 70 A0 i d diiv v vi vi vi ix x 80 do m 16 17 18 19 20 D 22 3 4 5 0 T 8 9 0 7 AQ ABFAEZH IKAMN O DO 02439000909 109 09 00 D 9 D BO IPEXTIOXYQ E0 B OOGO0GGOCX90 0000 CO agv etn8ixAuv o EO P ui Md AY EE karl pU A340 ASFF Dope 40 50 A740 A7FF 60 70 50 80 60 90 70 AQ 1 W amp Qt Z 80 O ABCDEEGHIT KLMNO x AO ABBLIZEEXSH KIIMH DO PQRSTUVWXYZ X BO OIIPCTYXOILUIII TI b 3 EO abcdefghijkimno CO pg FO pqrstuvwxyz DO a6BriAe BxsSuHilku1MH EO onperydxusumueHss FO wa November 2002 239 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix C Code Page 936 Simple Chinesle Cont A840 ASFF AC40 ACFF 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 80 80 90 90 A0 066086 858i l 1858 206 AQ BO amp ddd d n lha oe o hh BO CO g 5nt5bZz 5585r CO DO AC THe POPHaYTEEAL DO E0 x 5xLAIxu EO FO FO A940 ASFF AD40 ADFF 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 80 80 90 ex 90 A0 free bf edi AO B rrera DELE dg BO co FEEEF FH 4444444 CO DO L DO ED EO FO FO AAGO AAFF AE4O AEFF 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 80 80 90 90 A0 AO BO BO co co D0 DO EO EO F0 FO AB40 ABFF AF40 AFFF 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 10 80 80 90 90 AO A0 BO BO CO co DO DO EO EO FO
4. Chapter 4 Diagnostics The following diagnostic tests are available for the 7167 Level 0 Diagnostics Startup Performed during the startup cycle Level 1 Diagnostics Printer Configuration Allows configuration of the printer using a Configuration Menu that is printed on a receipt Level 2 Diagnostics Runtime The printer checks the status of these conditions during normal operation Level 3 Diagnostics Remote The printer keeps track of counters during normal operation Vendor Adjustment Performed in off line mode Allows to change settings for mechanical and perform printer test Modifications of these settings are to be made by service personnel only Level 0 Diagnostics The printer automatically performs level 0 diagnostics when it is put on line Level 0 diagnostics comprise the following actions Motors are turned off Microprocessor timing is checked CRC check of the firmware ROM is performed external RAM is read e The green LED on the slip table flashes once if this action succeeds e Level 0 diagnostics stop if this action fails Failure is indicated by the printer going dead knife and print head do not home the platen does not open LEDs are not lit the printer is unable to communicate with the host computer e Knife is homed A fault condition is caused if this action fails e Slip platen is opened e Slip print head is homed A fault condition is caused if this action fails e The status of all sens
5. 0117 inches B 1 45 mm 057 inches 1 24 mm 049 inches C 2 46 mm 097 inches D 353 mm 0139 inches E 1 83 mm 072 inches 1 49 mm 0585 inches November 2002 218 7167 Owner s Manual 4 4 500 pon pot w P o2 ee Wi 4 Ou ven Y MO COOS SE Next Row XXXXX oo D x EDR Value Colunms 8 9 and 10 are for graphics or for certain special characters Appendix B Print Characteristics Note Columns overlap within the format for each print row in half dot increments depending upon pitch but the printer cannot print overlapping dots on a single print row No ASCII character contains overlapping dots on a print row Double Wide Characters Double wide characters are upright characters in an 8x7 dot format with twice the column horizontal spacing between printed dots as for standard characters CX MB e009 2 See Meee ou et Columns 9 and 10 for certain special characters 219 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix B Print Characteristics Rotated Characters Rotated characters are alternate characters in a 5x7 dot format printed 90 degrees counterclockwise as shown in the illustration or clockwise Only one horizontal pitch is available 6 95 CPI 33 columns maximum 6D EDR dot feeds C Next Character Horizontal Pitch Dimension 6 95 CPI 33 Columns A 366 mm 0144 inches 2 56 mm 100 inches 1 75 mm 069 inch
6. 2e Code page 932 81 sp vos FO f o Code page 932 83 EO 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 932 Code page 932 Code page 932 82 Was cp a oe RAT C E ANPO O o HARE SN lH ur RYKES Z gt RNI S E WKY lt lt Kf Vm x x Hint lt m HARD rt O CG o 3 TR TN RIJ r DPAR EDN x gt lt THAD p NDIO w Oe A s LJ HIS lt gt wo 3 AR JX ML gt r F AR X 4H OWa b 0 Oo amp 0 4 X c viue E vul C wNHEHSL x HON Siew NEDSS ON gt Pl tone M gt lt X a 5 V OQ TL gt o Z Law Q U 2 2 H Qu gt 0 3 w K AN LOW DUH IG WPA OH OH ON moOdo a 5109529 KLMNOP 230 November 2002 emu oO 0 Hw O nj4g P4549 gt Co CO O C O O 000 Lt O CO G gt Li 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 932 Cont Code page 932 84 vp CU e Go 3 4 K MH yb xu qill b bl b 3 bay ra 3 amp Hrd t br T 50 n020r Ja 229 AL F Code page 932 88 ot UE EMPEUTSSESUAB IU BSIU A BY Se 45 ZO IMEEM GE LTEM BiG AR 3 52 Et AEN AGB E HZ HUBER SRR RENAR ALAS ARENIE Us Code page 9832 87 XXE GC X916 1012 13151616 PEO W vv vivivix X y s ti v sii IY UB VR BM AS mm Gr mm kG cem KKTeKEBXS SOS MORIAR gt 1 ZL A EI Code page 932 89 es teh WSR RUM CE pel ap ol ie 8 BIB 8 gt Thay 6218532 7 8 Par AE 21 198 8 BI o RRRA November 2002 Appendix C 231 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 932 Cont C
7. COLE O OQ XD x 0001 gt am 9 HN he ra D R NT OM PD o a XP gt 00 Ba v r o GI s z oz esi ow A AS N gt Ge l ol QR M cg TS CU LL Yr D gt EK ANS OO a Sooo e OO mnywe SO CL C OX C r D m9 X mx oIPJ ex B x r CO C LLI LL 59 T i OW Ix o OMAN CO ST HD CO F OD V H A Ce w Q S u 6s Tm dar i Q ls Tl umol yun 4 nuda 1 A amp i n n ns x n Il 1 M a aut Y uU uumwWw y uda gun n Wo B O G K Op D gt Z xX gt N ma a Di OT BY Of ECO aA C7 MF gt x m FN 7 lt i STOO OWN ODP ose IF zo OHN OO SF HO amp O F OD V MH A C 3E lt gt oe od x 1 SES CO CN CO xF LO WM OO Oo lt lt m c2 LL LL Nooo C CD OO O CO O OO O O O OOO O 228 November 2002 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page Katakana Code Page KATAKANA 234567898ABCDEF gt lt ED Hk IE CI CE eee HE SJ x te a 1417 ila im lt 29 HO 7 we MHI AMIN DS o gt DODANA rx He ODER EPR TE DAI 4 P C04 dco ee gt lt X on Mnet gt F Am For Il L rda S OY i s ms m mo ENBNMB _ i jO aa C O C AYP D gt XE x gt N mat J O G Of MO nw ECO CL C CY 3 I gt gt PN lt i lt o3 CO C3LlIl OTe Is j zo C2 r3 Nm XT IO wr OD lt V E A 229 November 2002 Appendix C
8. Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H57 amp Chr nL amp Chr nH Exceptions This command is effective only at the beginning of a line November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands This command is ignored if the line buffer is not empty and only effects the Receipt interface If the setting exceeds the printable area the maximum value of the printable area is used The maximum printable area is 576 dots for 80 mm paper width and 424 dots for 58 mm paper width See the illustration in the Set Left Margin command 1D 4C November 2002 121 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Print Characteristic Commands These commands control what the printed information looks like selection of character sets definition of custom defined characters and setting of margins The commands are described in order of their hexadecimal codes Select Double Wide Characters ASCII DC2 Hexadecimal 12 Decimal 18 Prints double wide characters The printer is reset to single wide mode after a line has been printed or the Clear Printer 0x10 command is received Double wide characters may be used in the same line with single wide characters Example MSComm 1 Output Chr amp H12 Select Single Wide Characters ASCII DC3 Hexadecimal 13 Decimal 19 Prints single wide characters Single wide characters may be used in the same line with double wide characters Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H13 122 N
9. Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H09 Set Column ASCII ESC DC4n Hexadecimal 1B14n Decimal 2720n Value of n Receipt Slip 1 44 Standard 80 mm 1 45 Standard 1 56 Compressed 80 mm 1 55 Compressed 1 32 Standard 58mm 1 42 Compressed 58mm Default of 5 1 114 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Prints the first character of the next print line in column n It must be sent for each line not printed at column one The value of n is set to one after each line Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H14 amp Chr n Exceptions The command cannot be used with Single or Double Density graphics Set Absolute Starting Position ASCII ESC n1 n2 Hexadecimal 1B 24 n1 n2 Decimal 27 361 n2 Value of n Number of dots to be moved from the beginning of the line Value of 11 Remainder after dividing n by 256 Value of 12 Integer after dividing n by 256 The values for n1 and n2 are two bytes in low byte high byte word orientation Sets the print starting position to the specified number of dots up to the right margin from the beginning of the line The print starting position is reset to the first column after each line Formulas Determine the value of n by multiplying the column for the absolute starting position by 10 slip or receipt standard pitch or 8 receipt compressed pitch The example shows how to calculate column 29 10 dots per c
10. IO D Bas x AD 4D G 0 4D D CA D 4D AD Ke lt lt C O K WAP I gt Z x gt q a BOOT D DDEC ECO A C3 Y Gy 72 gt gt m PN lt eb x C cocYuijiu OTH OS 1x Z O CO c3 CN OO SF Loom OM V H A Ce Dame m cO O wr cc Mm HYD LD T t C I lil Z HH Q L E B8 34 foe lt G ES r H r fJ N r 4T O 073 x ON Nl y r NO A L I OO gt X0 X20 L2 eb at x 0 CON CO D 470 4D DO QC XD XO CO Pt x2 O C C Mr 73 gt KANE c a BO O CG DY QE ECO CL CS Cr 90 i Z2 gt lt gt PM eU lt f lt On CO CO LLA LL OTH Ie Zo OWN CO ST LO D r OD ss ee V lH A EARI x oN 226 November 2002 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 860 862 863 and 864 Code Page 862 Code Page 860 234567898ABCDEF 23456789ABCDEF H VE 00 e gt C N NS S COL Ep OO TX uM cio 8 9 Oc feo wee mm s Sos F GEL EA j SE Rr FE m r 40 O D iZ mg O IL Ta D gt Ek gt MRE D Lou cd 96 9 n p Ree E n r n H GOcOro gt Z X gt N oes dg 0 O O G o O E C O A G 0C n I gt gt gt FN lt cono O LL LL C5 2 gt lt J zo QD r3 CN CO ST HO OI OO O gt V EAC EGRI ww x gt i DO C2 CN CO T LO O r 00 CO c cO OO
11. Print Order Line Spacing Thermal Receipt Station Fixed 576 Print Elements Direct Thermal Fixed Head Line of Dots Standard 13 x 24 Dots Compressed 10 x 24 Dots 0525 Wide by 092 High 15 25 Characters per Inch horizontal 15 6 Characters Inch Standard 20 3 Characters Inch Compressed For 80 mm paper 44 Columns Standard 56 Columns Compressed For 58 mm paper 32 Columns Standard 42 Columns Compressed Standard Compressed Double High Double Wide Upside Down Rotated Underline Scalable Bold Superscript Italic Subscript Code Page 437 850 852 860 863 865 858 866 1252 Katakana 874 862 864 and Space page 3019 Lines Minute 44 columns Depend on Line Spacing Descending 7 52 Lines per Inch default 8 47 8 13 7 81 7 25 7 00 5 98 Lines Inch and variable lines per inch Slip Station Bi directional Logic Seeking Serial Dot Matrix Ribbon Cassette Forms Insertion Standard 10 x 7 Dots Compressed 10 x 7 Dots 057 Wide by 097 High 13 9 Characters Inch Standard 17 1 Characters Inch Compressed 45 Columns Standard 55 Columns Compressed Standard Compressed Double Wide Upside Down Rotated Code Page 437 850 852 860 863 865 858 866 1252 Katakana 874 862 864 and Space page 240 202 164 142 Lines per Minute Depending on of Columns 40 column width Descending 7 2 Lines Inch default 10 3 9 0 8 0 6 5 6 0 Li
12. gt 4 Clicks Set Emulation Software Options gt 5 Clicks Set Hardware Options gt 6 Clicks Set Default Code page gt 7 Clicks Set EEPROM To Default Settings gt 8 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN at least 1 second to validate November 2002 56 7167 Owner s Manual Diagnostics Form Model number Serial number Boot Firmware Revision CRC Flash Firmware Revision CRC Hardware Flash Memory Size Flash Logos Size Flash Fonts Size Flash User Storage Communication Interface Interface Type Parameters Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Flow Control Reception Errors Receive Buffer Diagnostic Mode Emulation Software Printer Emulation Printer ID Mode Default LPI To enter Diagnostics Mode Flip DIP switch 1 on Reset the printer by pressing and holding the Receipt Feed switch down while disconnecting and reconnecting the power 7167 A991703053 V00 17 C525 V03 12 OEFF 2Mbytes 256Kbytes 64Kbytes 64Kbytes RS232 USB DTR DSR Print OFF Normal Moda 7158 Native Mode 7158 Native ID 7 52 Chapter 4 Diagnostics Printer Config Menu The config menu allows you to set general printer parameters Sub menus are entered and selections are made using the Paper Feed Button Short Click Feed Button is quickly depressed then released Long Click Feed Button is held Down more than 1sec then released CAUTION The settings are prede
13. m Printer Setting Change 206 n OFFH Asian Character Commands Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 1C21n Select print modes for Kanji characters 209 1C2Dn Turn underline mode ON OFF for Kanji 210 1C32c1c2 Define user defined Kanji characters 210 d1 dn 1C 53 nl n2 Set Kanji character spacing 211 1c57n Set quadruple mode ON OFF for Kanji 212 November 2002 85 7167 Owner s Manual Flash Download Commands 86 Chapter 6 Commands Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 1B 5B 7D Switch Flash Download Mode 213 1D 00 Request Printer ID 213 1D 01 Return Segment Number Status of Flash Memory 214 1D02n Select Flash Memory Sector to Download 214 1D 06 Get Firmware 215 1D 07 Return Microprocessor CRC 215 1D 0E Erase the Flash Memory 215 1D OF Return Main Program Flash CRC 215 1D10n Erase Selected Flash Sector 216 1D 11aLaHcL cH Download to Active Flash Sector 217 d1 dn 1D FF Reboot the Printer 218 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Comparison Chart Chapter 6 Commands The following table details the list of commands whose behavior differs from the NCR 7156 because of the physical differences of a 6 dots mm head 7156 versus an 8 dots mm head 7167 Where the 7156 made movements in n 152 inch increments the 7167 makes n 203 inch movements Command Description Difference between a 7156 anda 7167 configured in
14. 15 0 mm 59 in November 2002 222 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix B Print Characteristics Slip Form Parameters In order for the printer to handle forms properly the forms shall be flat and void of curls or wrinkles especially at the leading edge of the form Paper Feed Direction Glued Location JUDE 1 2 2 3 Form construction for glued edges 1 Bottom edge of form should not be glued 2 Paper feeding and insertion are affected by gluing method and the quality of glue used when form is glued on the right or top edge of form 3 Skewing may occur when the form is glued on the left edge or when a wide form is used The sensors on the printer slip station use a reflective type photo sensor Therefore the following precautions must be taken to allow for proper operation e Paper that has holes or is translucent in the sensor locations as shown below should not be used e When thin paper is used it should be placed between the top and bottom sheets of multi ply paper The thickest ply of paper should be the last ply November 2002 223 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix B Print Characteristics Check Size The size of the check that the slip station and check flip mechanism handles conforms to ANSI ABA standard X9 13 dated 1999 Personal Check 6 00 152 40 mm wide x 2 750 69 85 mm High Business 8 75 222 25 mm wide x 3 667 93 14 mm High MICR Media Requirements MICR Printing Printing of MICR Charac
15. 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units ASCII GSPxy Hexadecimal 1D50xy Decimal 29 80 xy Value of x Horizontal Value of y Vertical Range of x 0 255 Range of y 0 255 Default of x 203 Default of y 203 Sets the horizontal and vertical motion units to 1 x inch and 1 y inch respectively When x or y is set to 0 the default setting for that motion unit is used The default horizontal motion is x 203 Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H50 amp Chr x amp Chr y Exceptions This command is ignored if slip station is selected November 2002 113 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Horizontal Positioning Commands The horizontal positioning commands control the horizontal print positions of characters on the receipt and slip Horizontal Tab ASCII HT Hexadecimal 09 Decimal 9 Moves the print position to the next tab position set by the Set Horizontal Tab Positions 1B 44 n1 n2 00 command The print position is reset to column one after each line Tab treats the left margin as column one therefore changes to the left margin will move the tab positions When there are no tabs defined to the right of the current position or if the next tab is past the right margin line feed is executed both slip and receipt HT has no effect in page mode Printer initialization sets 32 tabs at column 9 17 25 Every 8 characters
16. Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 936 Simple Chinese Cont DC40 DCFF D840 D8FF T icy pr SESRAH ER RRR RARE kiki fin Nh EP BR Tm k m HX DD40 DDFF D940 D9FF DE40 DEFF DA40 DAFF DF40 DFFF DB40 DBFF 246 November 2002 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 936 Simple Chinese Cont E440 EFF E540 ESFF E640 E6FF E740 E7FF E040 EOFF E140 EiFF E240 E2FF E340 ESFF 247 November 2002 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 936 Simple Chinese Cont F440 F4FF F040 FOFF F540 F5FF F140 FlFF F640 F6FF F240 F2FF F740 F7FF F340 FOFF 248 November 2002 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual EC40 ECFF E840 E8FF ED40 EDFF EE40 EEFF EF40 EFFF E940 E9FF EA40 EAFF EB40 EBFF 249 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix C Code Page 936 Simple Chinese Cont F840 F8FF FC40 FCFF 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 80 80 90 90 AO AO BO BO co CO DO DO EO EO FO FO F940 F9FF FD40 FDFF 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 80 80 90 90 AO AQ BO BO CO CO DO DO EO EO FO FO FA40 FAFF FE40 FEFF 40 40 60 70 70 90 80 90 90 AO AO BO BO C0 CO po DO ED EO js FO FB40 FBFF FF40 FFFF 40 60 60 80 80 90 90 A0 AO BO BO DO DO E0 EO FO FO November ZUUZ ZOU 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix C Code Page 949 Korean A140 AIFF 40 50 60 70
17. Command Description Difference between a 7156 anda 7167 configured in 7156 Emulation Mode 1B 59 n1 n2 d1 dn Select Double Density Graphics In 7156 Emulation Mode the printer scales the graphics to provide the best match 1B5Cn1in2 Set Relative Print Position The parameter to this command is in units of dots However the command moves and aligns to character positions In 7156 Emulation Mode this command calculates how many character positions to move based on the 7156 s character width in dots 10 versus the 7167 s width 13 1B 61 7 Select Justification This command does true dot resolution alignment for centering versus character aligned centering 1D 2A n1 n2 d1 dn Define Downloaded Bit Image In 7156 Emulation Mode this command scales the incoming data to provide a best match to the size of the image as it printed on the 7156 printer 1D2F m Print Downloaded Bit Image Same as above 88 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Command Descriptions Chapter 6 Commands This section provides the detailed description of the commands These commands are separated into groups according to their function or use The previous sections can be used as an index for the following sections The following lists and describes the headings used to present the elements of the commands in the descriptions in this section Each command code is presented in three for
18. Connect the cash drawer cable to the printer and cash drawer The connectors is a standard phone jack located at the rear of the printer 14 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer 6 For Host powered installation plug the DC cable into the POS terminal or plug the power cord into the power supply for remote power supply installation then plug the power supply into an outlet At this point the printer receives power If the On Line LED green is on the printer is on line Otherwise the printer is not receiving power Check to insure that the host terminal is on or that the power supply is on Communication Power Cable Cable DIP Switch Cash Drawer Cash Drawer Cable Connector USB Cable Power Cable DIP Switch Cash Drawer Cash Drawer Cabl C t ais November 2002 15 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Bottom of the Printer 16 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer About the Universal Serial Bus The Universal Serial Bus USB is a peripheral bus for personal computers that was first released in January 1996 Since that time virtually all Intel Architecture personal computers have the hardware to support USB and a large number of computers exist that have both the hardware and software support required to interface with USB peripherals Advantages of USB connections USB has a number of advantages over lega
19. N nN E Chapter 6 Commands Status for ASB Undefined Undefined No Mechanical Error Mechanical Error Occurred No knife error Knife error occurred Not used Fixed to off No unrecoverable error Unrecoverable error occurred No recoverable error occurred Recoverable error occurred Receipt cover open Cassette cover open Receipt paper exhausted Thermal print head temp out of range Power supply voltage out of range Not used Fixed to off Status for ASB Receipt paper adequate Receipt paper low Receipt paper adequate Receipt paper low Receipt paper present Receipt paper exhausted Receipt paper present Receipt paper exhausted Not used Fixed to off Slip leading edge sensor paper present Slip leading edge sensor no paper Slip trailing edge sensor paper preset Slip trailing edge sensor no paper Not used Fixed to off November 2002 173 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Fourth Byte Paper Sensor Information Bit Off On Hex Decimal Status for ASB 0 Off 00 0 Slip paper selected On 01 1 Receipt paper selected 1 Off 00 0 Possible to print in slip On 02 2 Not possible to print on slip because no form has been inserted 2 Undefined 3 Undefined 4 Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to off 5 Undefined 6 Undefined 7 Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to off 174 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Bar Code Commands Th
20. November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Type ID n 4 Bit OfflOn Hex Decimal Function 0 Off 00 0 No logo definition loaded by application On 01 1 Logo loaded by application 1 Undefined 2 Undefined 3 Undefined 4 Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to Off 5 Undefined 6 Undefined 7 Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to Off Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H49 amp Chr n Transmit Printer ID Remote Diagnostics Extension ASCII GSI n Hexadecimal 1D 49 40n Decimal 2973 64n Values of n Refer to table above Range of n 32 255 not all defined but reserved Performs the remote diagnostic function specified by n Eighteen remote diagnostic items are defined eight printer ID items and ten printer tally items A group of four remote diagnostic functions is assigned to each diagnostic item Most of the diagnostic items are maintained in non volatile memory NVRAM but some are maintained in read only memory ROM The table that follows describes the variables The first item group in the table includes an example of data to send and to receive Data sent from the host to write to NVRAM must contain all digits required by the remote diagnostic item All data must be ASCII The printer returns all ASCII data It is preceded by the parameter n to identify the diagnostic item and is followed by a Carriage Ret
21. Set the printer configuration specified by m and n The printer is reset after receiving this command to activate the configuration setting If m or n is out of range this command is ignored The printer will wait for the data until the terminator code OFFH is received Example The following command would set the communication baud rate to 115 200 bps MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1F amp Chr amp H11 amp Chr amp H11 amp Chr amp HO amp Chr amp HFF November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Asian Character Commands Chapter 6 Commands Select print modes for Kanji characters ASCII FS n Hexadecimal 1C21n Decimal 28 331 Value of n Bit Off On Hex 1 Off 00 2 Off 00 On 01 3 Off 00 On 01 4 2 5 E i 6 E 7 Off 00 On 01 Default of n 0 Decimal oje ojo The character attribute for Asian character Function Select font Undefined Double width mode is not selected Double width mode is selected Double height mode is not selected Double height mode is selected Undefined Undefined Undefined Underline mode is not selected Underline mode is selected Selects character attribute for Asian character The underline mode can be turned on or off by using FS or ESC also The thickness of underline is defined by FS or ESC it does not relate to character size Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1C amp Chr amp H21 amp Chr n November 2002 209 7167 Owner s Manual
22. then data continues to be processed out of the buffer at approximately print speed and the Real Time commands will eventually get flushed out When the printer is busy due to an error condition then data stops being processed out of the buffer until the condition clears one way or another In either case but more quickly in the case of an error condition the buffer can fill with real time commands When the DLE sequences are being used the last byte stored when the buffer fills up could be the DLE code with no room for the subsequent EOT or ENQ When this lone DLE byte is finally processed out of the buffer it will be interpreted as a Clear Printer command Similarly when the GS sequences are being used the last byte stored when the buffer fills up could be the GS code with no room for the subsequent EOT or ETX or ENQ When this lone GS byte is finally processed out of the buffer it will use the next byte whatever it is as the second byte in its GS sequence To guard against this situation an application should determine the cause of a busy condition and take appropriate action or pace further real time commands to avoid filling the buffer There are a minimum of 256 bytes available in the printer s buffer when it goes busy November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Real Time Status Transmission ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Value of n GS Sequence GS EOT n 1D 04 n 294n GS DLE Sequence Chapter 6 Commands DLE
23. 1 Binary XOFF 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 Binay Auto Status Back ASB Response Recognized By ASB Byte 1 0 X x 1 x x 0 0 Binary ASB Bytes 2 4 0 X x O x x x x Binay 162 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Real Time Commands These commands provide an application interface to the printer even when the printer is not handling other commands RS 232C communication interface only 1 Real Time Status Transmission GS Sequence and DLE Sequence 2 Real Time Request to Printer GS Sequence and DLE Sequence 3 Real Time Printer Status Transmission The Batch Mode Printer Status commands are placed in the printer s data buffer as they are received and handled by the firmware in the order in which they are received If the paper exhausts while printing data that was in the buffer ahead of the status command the printer goes busy at the RS 232C interface and suspends processing the data in the buffer until paper is reloaded This is true for all error conditions knife home error slip paper jam thermal print head overheat etc In addition there is no way to restart the printer after a paper jam or to cancel a slip waiting condition when using the Wait for Slip command The Real Time commands are implemented in two ways to correct these problems Both implementations offer the same functionality which one you choose depends on the current usage of your application Preferred Implementation For a new application the GS 1D
24. 2 Settings Printer State OFF 0 OFF 0 On line Mode default ON 1 OFF 0 Diagnostic Mode OFF 0 ON 1 Flash Download Mode ON 1 ON 1 Vendor Adjustment Mode e tis optional to set this switch to ON when reflashing the IPL firmware Connecting the Cables There are three different types of cables that connect to the printer e Power supply cable supplying power from the host POS terminal or from a external power supply e Communication cable RS 232 or USB connecting the printer to the host computer e Cash drawer cable connecting the printer to one or two cash drawers Caution Disconnect the power before connecting the cables Always connect the communication cable and cash drawer cables before connecting power to the power source Always disconnect power to the power source before disconnecting the communication and cash drawer cables Follow these steps to connect the cables See the illustration on the next page 1 Unplug the power cable from its power source 2 Connect the power and communication cables to their respective connectors under the printer as shown in the illustration For RS232 cable be sure to screw the communication cable to the communication connector 3 Route the cables through the cable strain relief on the bottom of the printer then through the two slots in the cable access cover as shown in the illustration 4 Connect the communication cable to the appropriate host computer connector 5
25. 2002 Index 3 7167 Owner s Manual commands 181 Page mode commands 181 Paper advancing changin low 40 kols ordering out putting in the paper roll 42 removing 41 requirements suppliers Paper jam Paper low sensor setting 6 Paper out Paper width setting Parsing See MICR parsing Power turning on the printer B9 Power cables connecting Power requirements Power supply ordering 7 Print characterisitics commands 122 Print characteristics commands 122 Print commands Print densit receipt 214 setting Print head adjustment test modes setting Print problems Print timing Print zones receipt station slip station 221 Printer configuration Printer configuration setting 54 Printer emulations setting 64 Printer function commands 90 Printer status commands 151 Printer status commands 151 Printhead Index impact thermal Printhead thermal cleaning over under temperature 49 Printing nd limitations of 2 Problems contacting a service representative forms skew or catch 6 knife failure paper jam 48 paper out print is light or spotty 5 50 printhead over under temperature 49 Protocol RS 232C DTR DSR 74 XON XOFF R Real time commands 163 Real time commands 163 alternate implementation 163 preferred implementation 163 using 163 Receipt station character dot patterns 216 print zone
26. 40n Transmit Printer ID Remote Diagnostics 155 Extension 1D72n Transmit Status 156 1F 56 n Send Printer Software Version 161 82 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Real Time Commands Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 1004n Real Time Status Transmission DLE Sequence 165 1005n Real Time Request to Printer GS Sequence 168 1D 03 n Real Time Request to Printer DLE Sequence 168 1D 04n Real Time Status Transmission GS Sequence 165 1D 05 Real Time Printer Status Transmission 170 Auto Status Back Commands Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 1D61n Select or Cancel Auto Status Back 170 Bar Code Commands Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 1D48n Select Printing Position for HRI Characters 175 1D 66n Select Pitch for HRI Characters 176 1D 68 n Select Bar Code Height 176 1D 6B m d1 dk 00 Print Bar Code 177 or 1D 6B mn d1 dn 1D77n Select Bar Code Width 180 November 2002 83 7167 Owner s Manual Page Mode Commands Chapter 6 Commands Hexadecimal Command Macro Commands MICR Check Reader Commands MICR Parsing Code and Operands Command Page 0C Print and Return to Standard Mode Print and 181 Eject Slip 18 Cancel Print Data in Page Mode 182 1B 0C P
27. 6 Commands Enable or Disable Slip Paper End Feeding Stop ASCII ESCc7n Hexadecimal 1B 63 377 Decimal 279955n Value of n 0 Enable 1 Disable Default 0 Enable Enables or disables the the slip paper end feeding stop function When this feature is enabled the printer will print a line but will not perform a line feed when the slip paper end is detected Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H63 amp Chr amp H37 amp Chr n Related Information When either the trailing edge sensor or the leading edge sensor does not sense the paper the printer recongnizes this as a paper end condition November 2002 99 7167 Owner s Manual 100 Chapter 6 Commands Set Slip Paper Waiting Time ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Value of m Value of n ESC fmn 1B66mn 27102 mn Minutes Tenths of seconds Sets the time in m minutes that the printer waits for a slip to be inserted into the slip station It also sets the time n x 0 1 seconds that the printer waits to close the platen and start printing once the slip has been inserted The printer reads that a slip is inserted when the leading edge and trailing edge sensors are covered The LED on the slip table is lit green when both sensors are covered If a slip is not inserted in the time specified the receipt station is selected for the next function If m 0 the printer waits forever for a slip to be inserted The times set by th
28. 80 90 A0 B eed rU BO n 0 rj J 1 x CO lt gt co CAGE S F DO Z178y55 8x X yX xO0900 9 EO OMAAVY 1lezee FO fffesc2counAvaO A240 A2FF A340 ASFF 40 40 60 70 70 80 80 cerco gt 97 A gh ig D 1789368 g Z BO xnur amp d bh oeowo BO 0123456789 lt gt C 0empOor BUE EIE M ss CO GABCDEFGHIJKLMNO DU werd 1 2 Z NS b J p AGH DO PQRSTUVWXYZ W _ EO Naca TMampmTel EO abcdefghijkIimno FO FO parstuvwxye A440 AdFF A540 ABFF 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 80 80 90 90 A0 71 TVA L LX LB C EE amp E1 ED eli BA 2E eu AQ i ii di iv v vi viiviliix x BO sucumuAuoxxumxaENus l BO IIl IV V VIVIIVIIIX CO HER Hl 33 2 ua ac m sl CO ABFAEZH IKAMN O DO w LL LELA LA 2 2E HARGA 25 DH NA DO nPZTYOXWVWQ EO m B un uc BO HM HX t W J AT AL AC AW AX EO aBySeZn ixaApveEec FO ooo GAGA 88 LI B TA mE i FO npotugx yw November 2002 251 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 949 Korean Cont A740 ATFF A640 AGFF 90 60 70 80 90 A0 uemed kLccinten mk fmnmummncm BO kmmcrimikmhaugmgkgktcalkaidB eps CO nsusmspVnVuV mV kVMVpAnAuAmAKA pA DW DO rere ER 44 DO 4 TTT EO um KWMA Hz kHzMHzGHzTHz Q kM pF nF uF mal EQ cdrd sr PakPaliPaGPaWb Im Ix BaGy Sv ka FO A940 ASFF A840 A8FF SSS eS s lt Ee A a oe Zu AB40 ABFF AA40 A
29. A RS Ok A Hs Fa Be BER GE SA IMSE FU FR FUR OD RES ET A hi B5 MERE MULA SK AREAS RH akaqa Pa MARE ARAR ASAA NE PE RR lA A AA M AAEM MEAR E AA TARR ARTE AR EMER RC BRR RM Oc RA Code page 932 ED PIAGET AEA RSIS ta eee eee fel fi FS HEE IB 2L 280 82515788 FERES S TERT E EAR CERE TOA Utka S SS P pa ey 1812 Us ERE 53 551826 JR UIDI ARAR MES BSJBF EP R ERES RS EE BE RET MAREA EH MO MAE Har in MMSE Ae UR S n ete RERI Code page 932 FA a x H lllV V Vl ANo Tel AER RE m il AETB OR P bue 1816181858 4 ARS AA ESSE ANE i dtilliv v lt lt Ber Di ie Tong Xie SSE Elide November 2002 Appendix C 237 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 932 Cont Code page 932 FB iss e SPE Lae CES bip qut PCCW y Ss SPO 2 te ici SA s lli bebe a DRM MUN UC HORE 834 32 1 E RAE OA TERME ETE ECCLE ERES GR BS SBA GL a8 SS SHER 3638 38 35 BAR DATE HET LT epit Erase T BEST Code page 832 FC 40 AARP RE ERE A AR ER RA November 2002 Appendix C 238 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix C Code Page 936 Simple Chinese A440 AJFF 40 50 60 70 80 90 AO amp c e 5 5 Z 5 5 2 0 s lt BO CUR CoC ae L Ut Pee ese HREBrIICCEHRRAAOH DU PXKEUUUSBSE KANE gt EO tbt ototbxkuo9hps5n bb A140 ALFF RS M 40 A540 ASFF 50 60 40 70 50 80 60 90 70 A0 ES 07V ttu AM mpm t 80 BU Rah X 1 A0 7721415U5 m 23 x b D0 Oj BO YoY BAYH y Z2ZE tau YS EO 38
30. A0 BESERNIBENUE NERIS AO BO BERG eG A BO CO 3m SA Gir Fil M E DEAE SR AC E ERN CO DO RM CENE c DO E0 E LL rn CR CL ED FO a HH tH Ve Fe FA40 FAFF FE40 FEFF 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 80 80 90 90 AO A0 BO BO CO CO DO DO EO EO FO FO FB40 FBFF FF40 FFFF 40 40 50 30 60 60 70 70 80 80 90 90 A0 AO BO BO CO co DO Do EO EB FO FO November 2002 278 7167 Owner s Manual Index LU 7167 printer clearance rus environmental conditions 213 features location ordering supplies B power requirements 213 power supply ordering printer specifications reliability 214 sending in for re pair 11 specifications turning on A Accessories See Supplies Asian mode setting B Bar code commands 175 Bar codes commands 175 BASIC sending commands 73 C Cabinet cleaning Cables cash drawer b communication connecting Carriage return usage setting 65 Cash drawer ordering 7 Cash drawer cables connecting Changing paper 40 Character set code page 437 225 code page 850 226 Index code page 852 228 code page 863 230 code page 865 Character sets 224 Characters receipt station dot patterns 216 Characters slip station dot patterns 217 Check flip commands 200 setting Check flip commands 200 Check flip test modes setting 63 Checks printing validating verifying Cleaning the printer Cleara
31. D I c4 72x zz O CO 4 CN CO ST O QO OO C oo V H A 227 November 2002 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 865 866 874 and 1252 Code Page 866 Code Page 865 23456789ABCDEF 23456789ABCDEF WD OHtir mA c c 0m C O gt e x T gt a g ie 6 G zx tt Fa u k EE Fo E id H III RR OF m m c0 y O m iL CI Q 0 x x ee Z T O A O I gt gt JIa Lx O c T 2 OQ L EIL O5 lt gt lt LA I OL m C Were arse x gt IN Tm a Bm O G oF DCZ a FCO O O CC Ve Z gt gt x gt Ne lt Cd lt cr c 2 C LL LL OD gt gt lt IE ZO CO CN CO xr 2 D Om os V H A 05 x i CO r3 CN C2 XT 12 Om 00 C Tr cO C2 CX LL L_ Q O O C O CO S O O O C O C3 OO O H I AL VI uo vc 3 SMe FENDO Are Dawe 8 e G i E 4 t4 B E F HSS ES OS H 3 FF r FA rc G O iC Zm oO IL TN xz Hd Ll 8 MB OO OD D NOD W CQ C p 4D 40 OOD AD OD eT a cv nr 0 gt SM gt Ne a g Q OD OY MO ECO A O CX M DY Se lt CLII Tr D gt lt 01 Z O Dmm CN CO NF GO OP OO Q ee ee V H AC e eon o x CO 0N T LO D 00 COO lt m CD C C D S eo C O OoOO Code Page 1252 Code Page 874 23496789 ABCDEF 23456789ABCDEF WT OOO O TS C3 03 073 o0 0c TO qD OU OD 88 OD D D Xp
32. FO November 2002 240 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 936 Simple Chinese Cont B440 B4FF B040 BOFF LEY LI aE Mh lt Bey B540 B5FF B140 BiFF B640 B6FF B240 B2FF B740 B7FF B340 BOFF 241 November 2002 Appendix C BC40 BCFF BD40 BDFF BE40 BEFF BF40 BFFF B840 B8FF B940 B9FF BB40 BBFF Code Page 936 Simple Chinese Cont BA40 BAFF 7167 Owner s Manual dis Se gs H mit MER LERI EH WRI E KRK RER ORB FERRE ste EE d tir 5k KO NB SE ES Ses TH ra qa Se gk eS SES at 32 gas SS S ah E RRE El dn ist Lik SR 242 November 2002 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 936 Simple Chinese Cont C440 C4FF C040 COFF Wen gene KIRI KEERN IS p a BS 3 SR ME RE HK L4 117 3 C540 CSFF C140 CIFF C640 C6FF C240 C2FF C740 C7FF C340 C3FF 243 November 2002 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 936 Simple Chinese Cont CC40 CCFF C840 C8FF ERIRE SE BX He a EK KERERE CD40 CDFF C940 COFF CE40 CEFF CA40 CAFF CF40 CFFF CB40 CBFF 244 November 2002 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 936 Simple Chinese Cont D440 DAFF D040 DOFF FRAZ EEHEHE Im CT SEK g Ip 2E B HEE Ego i RUE LI D540 DSFF D140 DIFF Ree EE NUS D640 D6FF D240 D2FF D740 D7FF D340 DSFF 245 November 2002
33. Front Cover and clear paper from path If visible through Front Window open access door and clear paper jam if not open Front Cover and clear jam November 2002 Chapter 3 Solving Problems Where to Go See Loading and Changing the Receipt Paper in chapter 2 Where to Go See Loading and Changing the Receipt Paper in chapter 2 See Contacting a Service Representative later in this chapter See Contacting a Service Representative later in this chapter 48 7167 Owner s Manual AC supply voltage is out of range Thermal print head temperature is out of range Power supply voltage is out of range If paper is not low and no conditions indicate that the thermal print head is too hot then it is likely that the power supply voltage is out of range Contact a service representative if this does not resolve the problem The print head may overheat when printing in a room where the temperature is above the recommended operating temperature or when printing high density graphics continuously regardless of the room temperature In either case the printer will shut off If the temperature of the print head is too hot adjust the room temperature or move the printer to a cooler location If the print head is overheating because of printing high density graphics continuously reduce the demand on the printer If the printer continues to overheat contact a service representat
34. Hexadecimal 1B2Dn Decimal 27 45 7 Value of n 0 48 Cancel underline mode 1 49 Select underline mode Default of n 0 Cancels underline mode Turns underline mode on or off Underlines cannot be printed for spaces set by the Horizontal Tab Set Absolute Start Position or Set Relative Print Position commands This command and the Select Print Mode s command 1B 21 turn underline on and off in the same way Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H2D amp Chr n Exceptions This command is ignored if n is out of the specified range This command is only available in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode Copy Character Set from ROM to RAM ASCII ESC 000 Hexadecimal 1B 3A 303030 Decimal 27 58 48 48 48 Default Code Page 437 Copies characters in the active ROM set to RAM Use this command to re initialize the User Defined Character Set Code Page 437 is copied by default at initialization The command is ignored if current font is the user font Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H3A amp Chr amp H30 amp Chr amp H30 amp Chr amp H30 Related Information 130 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands To modify characters in one of the character set variations such as Rotated Print select one of the Rotated Print commands copy to RAM then use the Define User Defined Character Set command 1B 26 Cancel User Defined Characters ASC
35. Kanji characters 209 1C2Dn Turn underline mode ON OFF for Kanji 210 1C 32 c1 c2 d1 dn Define user defined Kanji characters 210 1C53n1n2 Set Kanji character spacing 211 1F56n Send Printer Software Version 161 1c57n Set quadruple mode ON OFF for Kanji 212 1D 00 Request Printer ID 213 1D 01 Return Segment Number Status of Flash 214 Memory 1D02n Select Flash Memory Sector to Download 214 1D03n Real Time Request to Printer DLE Sequence 168 1D04n Real Time Status Transmission GS Sequence 165 1D 05 Real Time Printer Status Transmission 170 1D 06 Get Firmware CRC 215 1D 07 Return Microprocessor CRC 215 1D 0E Erase the Flash Memory 215 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Hexadecimal Command Page Code and Operands Command Name 1D OF Return Main Program Flash CRC 216 1D10n Erase Selected Flash Sector 216 1D 11 al ah cl ch d1 dn Download to Active Flash Sector 217 1D14n Reverse Feed n Lines 112 1D15n Reverse Feed n Dots 112 1D21n Select Character Size 137 1D22n Select Memory Type SRAM Flash Whereto 203 Save Logos or User Defined Fonts 1D 22 55 n1 n2 Flash Allocation 204 1D 23n Select the Current Logo Downloaded Bit 146 Image 1D 24 nL nH Set Absolute Vertical Print Position in Page 187 Mode 1D 2A n1 n2 d1 dn Define Downloaded Bit Image 147 1D 2F m Print Downloaded Bit Image 149 1D 3A Start or End Macr
36. Level 3 DiagrnoStcs ettet tere m a EHE ka EERTE REE RaRa Chapter 5 Communication Communication Overview lir emer Sending Commands cioe to ERIT D EE ReeY PCRPRERERTRIR seers R5 23 26 NS Print Speed and VMI gs ies etr eec ei XONZXOBE Protocol t E re E e e PIR DSR Dro RS 232C Technical Specifications eee viii November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Appendix A Specifications Contents RS 232C 9 Pin to 9 Pin Cable Diagramn sss USB Cable Connector uec iain pe et ee ee tette Power Cable Co nect r 0 Cash Drawer Connector and Pin Assignments pp Setting Extra RS 232C Options oi Out 73 List of Commands and Locatigom essere By Command Code eite itii br Dg o C RR P rv deser Printer Function Commands cccccccccsscsscesscesscssecsseceecsescssecsseeecesceseceseeaeenaes Vertical Positioning and Print Horizontal Positioning Commands Print Characteristic Commands sese Graphics Commands neret erret ier te E Statiis Commands a RE e e eren Real Time Commands eE nnne nnd Auto Status Back Commands sse Bar Code Comimands eee nn Macro Commands si He e eres MICR Check Reader Commands eese MICR Parsing scettr tee vo apaypaya ie tbe User Data Storage Commands sse Asian Character Commands sess
37. MICR Option Check Flip Option Color Paper Option MICR Dual Pass Setting Default Code Page Setting EEPROM to default settings November 2002 Chapter 4 Diagnostics 55 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics Configuring the Printer Use the Configuration Menu to select functions or change various settings as indicated in the preceding sections The Configuration Menu prints instructions and setting options interactively as the user goes through the configuration process Caution Be extremely careful in changing any of the printer settings to avoid changing settings that might affect the performance of the printer DIP Switch Switch 1 is shown in the OFF position 1 Set DIP Switch 2 to Off Switch 1 to On 2 Resetthe printer For resetting the printer instruction see Chapter 2 page 13 This configuration menu allows you to set mechanical adjustment parameters and select printer test Sub menus are entered and selections are made using the Paper Feed Button Short Click Feed Button is quickly depressed and released Long click Feed Button is held down more than 1 second Press the paper feed for the configuration you want Defaults are marked with asterisk Ob Ob oe be E Main Menu HEE OE EE hE kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Select a sub menu EXIT gt 1 Click Print Current Configuration gt 2 Clicks Set Communication Interface gt 3 Clicks Set Diagnostics Modes
38. Native ID 7 52 Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Printer Config Menu The config menu allows you to set general printer parameters Sub menus are entered and selections are made using the Paper Feed Button Short Click Feed Button is quickly depressed then released Long Click Feed Button is held Down more than 1sec then released CAUTION The settings are predetermined in factory and should generally not be changed to avoid changing other functions IIE Jee Main Menu freres TEI ITI III kek kkk I RT TR TR I kkk Select a sub menu EXIT 1 Click Print Current Configuration 2 Clicks Set Communication Interface 3 Clicks Set Diagnostics Modes 4 Clicks Set Emulation Software 5 Clicks Set Hardware Options 6 Clicks Set Default Code Page 7 Clicks Set EEPROM To Default 8 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWM at least 1 second to validate Important Ensure that the configuration settings match your host computer if not enter the Configuration Menu to make changes Follow the instructions on the scrolling menu pressing the Paper Feed button to make selections Indicate Yes with a long click and No with a short click e Press and hold the Paper Feed button for at least one second for a long click e Press the Paper Feed button quickly for a short click 5 Select Set Communication Interface from the Main Menu The printer scrolls to the first menu selection
39. Printer ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Default Character Pitch Column Width Extra Dot Rows Character Set Printing Position ESC 1B 40 27 64 Receipt 15 6 CPI 44 characters 80mm 32 characters 58mm 2 Code Page 437 Column One Chapter 6 Commands Slip 13 9 CPI 45 characters Code Page 437 Column One Clears the print line buffer and resets the printer to the default settings for the startup configuration refer to Default settings above Single Wide Single High Non Rotated and Left Aligned characters are set and User defined characters or logo graphics are cleared Flash Memory is not affected Tabs are reset to default settings Receipt selection state is selected Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H40 Set Slip Paper Eject Length ASCII ESCCn Hexadecimal 1B43n Decimal 2767n Value ofn 0 to 255 Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H43 amp Chr n Exception This command is ignored 94 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select Receipt or Slip for Printing Slip for MICR Read ASCH ESCc0n Hexadecimal 1B 6330n Decimal 27 99 48 n Value ofn 0 Journal selected 1 2 3 Receipt selected 4 Slip selected Default of n 1 Selects the station for printing When the slip station is selected the printer waits based on the slip waiting time setting ie 1B 66 m n for the paper t
40. Sequence DLE FOT n 10 04n 164n 1 Transmit printer status 2 Transmit RS 232C busy status 3 Transmit error status 4 Transmit receipt paper status 5 Slip paper status Transmits the selected one byte printer status specified by n in Real Time according to the following parameters This command includes two sequences GS and DLE and using either or will produce the same result Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H04 amp Chr n Exceptions The command is ignored if n is out of range An application using the DLE sequence must send EOT within 100 milliseconds of DLE or the printer will misinterpret the DLE and execute a Clear Printer command Avoid this possibility by using the 1D 04 n sequence which is handled exactly the same as 10 04 n November 2002 165 7167 Owner s Manual Related Information Chapter 6 Commands 1 Transmit Printer Status Bit 0 1 2 166 Status Off On Off On Off Status Off Hex 00 02 00 04 00 08 10 00 Hex 00 02 00 04 00 08 10 00 20 00 40 00 Decimal oo O O N O 0 Decimal oje COINIO Function Fixed to Off Fixed to On One or both cash drawers open Both cash drawers closed Not busy at the RS 232C interface Printer is Busy at the RS 232C interface Fixed to On Undefined Undefined Fixed to Off Transmit RS 232C Busy Status Function Fixed to Off Fixed to On Bo
41. Station for all functions The receipt station is the default setting after the printer is initialized or the Clear Printer 0x10 command is received The Hex command 1B 63 30 n where n 4 will also select the slip station Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1C Exceptions This command is ignored if Asian mode is On by diagnostic setting Select Cut Mode and Cut Paper ASCIL GSVm or GSVmn Hexadecimal 1D 56 m or 1D56mn Decimal 29 86m or 2986mn Value of m Selects the mode as shown in the table Value of n Determines cutting position only if m is 65 or 66 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual 0 48 1 49 65 66 Range of m Range of n Default of n Default of m Chapter 6 Commands Feed and Cut Mode Full cut no extra feed Partial cut on the 7158 7167 Partial cut no extra feed Feeds paper to cutting position n times vertical motion unit and cuts the paper completely Feeds paper to cutting position n times vertical motion unit and performs a partial cut 0 48 1 49 65 66 when used with n 0 255 Selects a mode for cutting paper and cuts the paper There are two formats for this command one requiring one parameter m the other requiring two parameters m and n The format is indicated by the parameter m Formulas n times the vertical motion unit is used to determine the cutting position to the distance that the paper is fed Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp
42. WASET Cao NUAN E0 dp Et p s d F0 HRR ARAURI SF Wir en Du BO DE anna aie He anu CO MTA RACHA RE Se A RR REOR IR DO PAARI EAS MEE E SR PH E EO BEUUGEAREEEAUTS S ROP AL AE AAD A BE I FO jJETSAREUR E HLL BR EE S Code page 932 91 St SD FF i1 Nas ene 3 HD MEN ir atte S Hill ni a sa ONE IRR 2A 385 FT TA BSH A Uh Renee WB Be ST ere Pa RA EE EXIT 2n NEUE ae SS ROC WREAK ARERR A SO EF PRADA MIB aT SS A Ee ESR Code page 932 93 E WU SK IK tS ai z ix tn B ean b FT he E i _ EE RE ge Eg K i r Seo haola Fee ZO ae E wait he D AURA S s ORAS Bs VF MEL 3 EXCESS HS LH MANOR AMI H3LA Code page 932 95 XE 830 UO SS SCI PSOE ECRIRE Sfi PP BEEK ET GERE ps sa 2 RR Ez IN FERLET HURA E PARRA OE BE 008 PRINS SS HABA RB November 2002 Appendix C 233 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 932 Cont Code paga 932 96 i38 9 Fake 275 88 1 amp 18555 8354 o NUR C855 SIE RESP ME W AS ARE RAR A TA GRAL PME ANAT RAS MIEI E IRA 2 8 FL RI MEAS DA LA P SS EAR MA RAT A A SM AZ AAACN BARE Cine eae HE REOS S SR 2 3 FE RG A ap A Be Loma 8881815723 E d 20 Rmi aa BKA MARS FARE OTE Sa cT PR ERR ANE AeA 8 00 2 0 S fg Ro 2248 UB 8 e P S er 665 IS IARI D O0 a Code page 932 9A REMAN E T GR MAST UR Bit S 18050 VENDO EE OR cai DA ERR UR OR OO MRO ified edt Pi ERE 31 0 354 UR n jigi SINI TETTA WI EEA IN MAN Pf al UR CE 1 A CF RD CRT RR GNO SA E DICIT ETT TE
43. a MO T DT SESE LE MALS ft De Be HR a be Se E uy STE EE RIG RIES FO qe I AE BEE SA HO ee el RS Fk i ty Sess A PAER Uh SUS he IEE Fa Fe E RS i MELLE IE AE TENTE ACIE 1k Tee S RR Tee RA puta 1315 TIRFERRTRIBE PHT x BY SF bF KERL RE A ERU Bey M Se DER BE ERLE ER CF40 CFF FBLA AG RRA HE MEAE RTS RE A siti AIFS Se Vu Bret BES PRGA eB RUE SESS FM RIERA SAE SURE TAC SLBA ETE FUE RIT DhHUA DS KL eh Ss EAEE E EIRENE IFE HEURE EEE AE A RORE UE RE 2 3 HTREBSBRSSBSESEFSHISKEKISELEKIRES fT TLIC RL EL PRES November 2002 Appendix C 272 7167 Owner s Manual Code Pare 980 Traditional Chinese Cont 0040 DOFF get COE RE HT HL ES E EAA E Re PRP UL E NEE BERG BARBIE RENAT DRAE KAAS SA ELAN eles a e ns ERG d n ETORT BERRES M MN KORR S EUR Ti Tal TRE REESE CIR D A TI rg nanan D140 DIFF rap R NAR E a M ER VIR Soe SHE EAR LR TUS JOUER UE RI UR MANU Wi apta RC eC UB EE I Ze Smee ACH SPORTS RUE ges joe BEE EATR ECTS SIX CR Lap a ML ERS D240 D2FF AA MUTA athe ae DOS EEN TANARA ER AHRI H E HY TRUE KE EAR RR SEIA ISA AERE TE SS ETE AERE ERER BRA Ria MI i 21 EMIL TATE ROTA BERE EMAER AEREE D340 D3FF SAM sin Sa Sher A 2 ETELE EHE AN SERRE ELO LET D440 D4FF INIRE MR Ede Ig m ae a HE Eerie ee PETE G pU W Ug D540 DSFF LE delet PE EE PE PR RNE fem TORRE ee an Ue e ECRIRE SETS a SIR e 0 Site E REB ENS QT IUS HEBES HR eS IT RR ME IRIEIBOU IR E CREER D AIC Ue ERR D
44. amp H77 amp Chr amp H52 November 2002 191 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands MICR Parsing This section describes MICR parsing in detail and includes several examples of useful parsing variations It also describes how to create a parsing format and how to create and maintain an exception table Define Parsing Format Save in NVRAM ASCII ESC w P d1 d2 dn CR Hexadecimal 1B7750d1d2 dn0D Decimal 27119 80 d1 d2 dn 13 Defines and saves parsing format See Parsing Parameter String Options in this document Send with this command the parse data that is to be the default parse string at printer power up If no parameters are selected parsing is not performed d1 through dn are the parse string The string must be CR terminated If the string has invalid characters in it or is too long the printer will store a null string and raw MICR data will be returned See sample parsing examples Define Parsing Format Do Not Save Permanently ASCII ESC w p d1 d2 dn CR Hexadecimal 1B 77 70 d1 d2 dn CR Decimal 27119 112 d1 d2 dn CR Defines but does not save parsing format See Parsing Parameter String Options in this document Send this command as often as desired to change the previous parse format string The data sent with 1B 77 50 will be restored at power up d1 through dn are the parse string The string must be CR terminated If the string has invalid characters in it or is too long the printe
45. and not respond to any of the Batch Mode Printer Status commands If the fault causing the busy condition can be cleared such as by loading paper or letting the thermal print head cool down the printer will resume processing the data in its receive buffer November 2002 151 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Transmit Peripheral Device Status ASCII ESC u0 Hexadecimal 1B 750 Decimal 271170 Bit 0 Bit 1 Return Value 1 Drawer 1 closed 1 Drawer 2 closed 0 Drawer 1 open 0 Drawer 2 open Bits 2 7 are not used Transmits current status of the cash drawers One byte is sent to the host computer In DTR DSR protocol the printer waits for DSR SPACE If a drawer is not connected the status will indicate it is closed Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H75 amp Chr amp H0 152 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Transmit Printer Status ASCII ESCv Hexadecimal 1B 76 Decimal 27118 Sends status data to the host computer The printer sends one byte to the host computer when it is not busy or in a fault condition In DTR DSR protocol the printer waits for DSR SPACE Status Byte RS 232C Bit Function 0 Signifies 1 Signifies 0 Receipt Paper Ok Low 1 Receipt Cover or Front Cover Closed Open 2 Receipt Paper Ok Out 3 Knife or Slip Ok Jam 4 Always Zero 5 Slip Leading Edge Sensor Not Covered Covered 6 Slip Trailing Edge Se
46. by using the holes on the cover Mount the screws on the wall using the following recommended mount dimensions Use a 8 wood screw which is to be securely fastened to a wall stud or using Molly fasteners not provided 10mm 39 in 175mm 6 89 in 12 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Setting Switches The DIP switches located at the back of the printer are used for three purposes e To set variables for several printer functions see the sections for the various printer functions in Level 1 Diagnostics in Chapter 4 Diagnostics for Setting Up The Printer e To perform diagnostic tests see the sections for the various diagnostic tests in Level 1 Diagnostics in Chapter 4 Diagnostics for Setting Up The Printer Caution The DIP switches are set to OFF Back of Printer DIP Switch Switch 1 is shown in the OFF position Note Switch 1 is shown in the Off position for reference Use a paper clip or other pointed object to set the switches 1 Set the switches to the desired settings shown in the table 2 Reset the printer Printer Reset The printer is reset by disconnecting reconnecting the DC power or by opening the slip door and closing the slip door while holding the receipt paper feed button down DIP Switch Settings November 2002 13 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Switch 1 Settings Switch
47. check four characters and 010 01010 account 10 characters then stored in the other three words of the table entry using Ox1B 0x73 0x24 0x4A 27 0x1B 0x73 0x00 0x00 28 0x1B 0x73 0x00 0x00 29 Example 2 t22137 632t001 60422020927540 2754 is the check serial 6042202 is the account To load the third table entry which starts at word 30 the transit number 2137 632 would be stored in the first two words of its table entry using this string of commands 0x1B 0x73 0x22 0x13 30 Ox1B 0x73 0x76 0x32 31 After the right transit symbol are four characters to skip a seven digit account number two characters to skip and finally a four digit check serial The final character to skip need not be encoded These would be bitwise encoded as 100 00100 skip four characters 010 00111 account seven characters 100 00010 skip two characters 001 00100 check four characters then stored in the other three words of the table entry using Ox1B 0x73 0x84 0x47 32 Ox1B 0x73 0x82 0x24 33 Ox1B 0x73 0x00 0x00 34 Maintaining the Exception Table Present contents of the exception table can be examined using the read NVRAM command Ox1B 0x6A k November 2002 199 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands which reads and returns word k in NVRAM When the exception table is full a new entry can replace an older less frequently used entry by merely rewriting the words for that table entry Check Flip Command Check Flip Com
48. connected Check all cable connections Check that the See Connecting the properly host computer and power supply are both on Cables in chapter 2 the power supply is turned on by plugging it into an outlet Power supply may be defective If the power supply is plugged in but does See Ordering Other 47 not come on you will need to order a new Supplies in chapter 1 power supply November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Green LED Blinking Slow Problem Receipt paper is low What to Do There are about 4 1 2 meters 3 meters 15 feet 10 feet of paper left Change the paper soon to avoid running out of paper part way through a transaction Green LED Blinking Fast Problem Receipt paper is out Receipt cover or front cover is open Knife failure Paper jam in slip station Paper jam in carriage Paper jam during flip What to Do Change the paper now Do not runa transaction without paper as the data may be lost Close the cover The printer will not operate with either of the covers open Open the receipt cover and check the knife Clear any jammed paper you can see Tear off any excess paper against the tear off blade Contact a service representative if this does not resolve the problem Open the front cover and check the slip table and under the carriage Remove any paper you see If you cannot see a paper jam or other obstruction contact a service representative Open
49. descriptions of character pitches print modes November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Set Character Right Side Spacing ASCII ESC SP n Hexadecimal 1B20n Decimal 2732n Range of t 0 32 Default 0 Sets the right side character spacing to n x horizontal or vertical motion units Values for this command are set independently in Standard and Page Mode The units of horizontal and vertical motion are specified by the Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units 1D 50 command Changes in the horizontal or vertical units do not affect the current right side character spacing When the horizontal or vertical motion unit is changed by the Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units 1D 50 command the value must be in even units and not less than the minimum amount of horizontal movement In Standard Mode the horizontal motion unit is used In Page Mode the horizontal or vertical motion unit differs and depends on the starting position of the printable area When the starting printing position is the upper left or lower right of the printable area set by Select Print Direction in Page Mode 1B 54 n the horizontal motion unit x is used When the starting printing position is the upper right or lower left of the printable area set by Select Print Direction in Page Mode 1B 54 n the vertical motion unit y is used Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H20 amp Chr n Excepti
50. eene nnne nnne Flash Download Commands eese Printer Function Commands Vertical Positioning and Print Commands Horizontal Positioning Commands ne Print Characteristic Commands n Graphics Commands eon ce od ier TIN eg Status Commands doin petet u GR rt Ro eH Real Time Commands sese enne Auto Status Back Commamnds sss Page Mode Cominarids itt tit entretien eae Macro Commands enne enne nnne nennt nennen nnne nnn MICR Commands tete EEE E ba ce eye eee leo quis MICK Partsine oe oe a Check Flip Command e ED ERREUR aurea User Data Storage Commands sse Asian Character Commands nn Flash Download Commands sess Printing Specifications nett i re t Pre E ee Ee ERE Power REGUITEMENES ene a hs ena esent sus docena tede vae eiua de Environmental Conditions tto reete nem eee ReliaDmity se M X November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Contents Dimensions and Weight ea M 215 Density ot Receipt Print Lines eee e Ht niet re or ota 215 Duty Cycle Restrictions Printing Solid Blocks 0 215 Appendix B Print Characteristics Character SIZe a auteni us atem On d I I D er ee hiles Receipt Station Slip Station Print Zones Receipt Station Slip StatiOn cuiota er onte ene er o n ed gal aged Gauss ARE Xanga Slip Form Parameters CHECK SIZE o
51. first exception table entry is unavailable November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Sample Parsing Formats The following strings show various sample formats that you can use assuming they meet your parsing format needs Included with the sample format is a description of the data that is returned to the application ESC w p 18 A lt CR gt Maximum 18 characters in the account number Final Carriage Return ESC w p 18 X A lt CR gt Maximum 18 characters in the account number with spaces and dashes removed Final Carriage Return ESC w p 18 x A lt CR gt Maximum 18 characters in the account number with spaces and dashes replaced with 0 Final Carriage Return ESC w p 018 A lt CR gt Always 18 characters in the account number high order zero filled if necessary Final Carriage Return ESC w p 018 X A lt CR gt Always 18 characters in the account number with spaces and dashes removed Final Carriage Return ESC w p 018 x A lt CR gt Always 18 characters in the account number with spaces and dashes replaced with 0 Final Carriage Return ESC w p T 18 X A 04C CR All characters in the transit number All characters in the account number up to 18 with spaces and dashes removed Always four characters in the check number zero filled if check number is only three characters long Final Carriage Return ESC w p K9 X T 18 X A 04C lt CR gt Canadian check dash in transit number removed 9 insert
52. line November 2002 119 7167 Owner s Manual lt Chapter 6 Commands This command is ignored if the line buffer is not empty and only effects the Receipt interface Set Printing Area Width ASCII GSW nLnH Hexadecimal 1D 57 nL nH Decimal 2987 nL nH Range of nL 0 255 Range of nH 0 255 Default 80 mm width 58 mm width 576 dots the maximum printable area 424 dots the maximum printable area Sets the width of the printing area If the setting exceeds the printable area the maximum value of the printable area is used The width of the printing area is set to nH X 256 nL times horizontal motion unit inches The horizontal motion units are set by the Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units command 1D 50 The width of the printing area follows the Set Left Margin command 1D 4C See the Set Left Margin command 1D 4C earlier in this document for a description Formulas To set the width of the printing area to one inch at the default horizontal motion unit of 1 203 inches send the four byte string GS W 203 0 Or to set the width of the printing area to two inches at the default horizontal motion unit of 1 203 units per inch send the four byte string GS W 150 1 Where 2 inches 406 203 and 406 1 X 256 150 Printable area 576 dots gt o A Left margin 120 Example gt lt Printing area width 95 MSComm 1 Output
53. modes eo emulation software options 64 hardware options 67 knife option maximum power option MICR option 69 MICR test modes paper low sensor 68 paper width 68 print density print head gap adjustment test modes 63 printer configuration printer emulations 64 receipt test modes 62 RS 232 interface set extra RS 232C options 78 slip test modes Level 2 diagnostics Level 3 diagnostics Location choosing 11 clearance TI Macro commands Macro commands 189 Maintenance cleaning the printer Maximum power Index setting 67 MICR commands setting MICR check reader operating environment MICR check reader commands 191 209 MICR parsing check serial number parsing 197 exception table entry format 198 parameter string options 19 sample parsing formats 195 MICR test modes setting 62 Modes check flip test datascope MICR test print head adjustment testes receipt test 62 slip test 61 Operator panel 73 Options asian mode 66 carriage return usage 69 check flip 69 color Ms E 67 default lines per inch knife 68 maximum power 67 MICR 69 paper low sensor 68 paper width 68 print density printer emulations 64 Ordering cash drawer 7 communication cables 7 documentation 7 paper power spp supplies Packing material removing repacking printer 11 Page mode November
54. print head does not normally require cleaning if the recommended paper grades are used If non recommended paper has been used for an extended period of time cleaning the print head with the alcohol and cotton swabs will not be of much benefit See Ordering Thermal Paper in chapter 1 for recommended paper LED Slip Table Does Not Come On Problem Form or check not inserted properly Forms Skew or Catch Problem Form or check skewing or catching in slip station due to an obstruction or paper jam What to Do Line up the form or check against the guide wall and slide it toward the back of the printer until it contacts the form stop and can t go any further Extra long forms may need to be inserted from the side to disengage the form stop Contact a service representative if this does not resolve the problem What to Do Open the front cover and check for any paper jams or obvious obstruction in the slip station Clear the obstruction or jammed paper Contact a service representative if this does not resolve the problem November 2002 Where to Go See Printing on Forms or Checks or Validating and Verifying Checks in chapter 2 See Contacting a Service Representative later in this chapter Where to Go See Contacting a Service Representative later in this chapter 50 7167 Owner s Manual MICR Check Reader Not Reading Properly Problem MICR Magnetic Ink Characte
55. printer far enough to be accessible to the operator The impact station opens the platen in all cases This command has the same code as the Print and Return to Standard Mode command which is executed only when the printer is in Page Mode When the printer is not in Page Mode this command executes the print and eject slip function Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp HOC Exceptions This command is ignored if the receipt station is the current station November 2002 105 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Print and Carriage Return ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal CR 0D 13 Prints one line from the buffer and feeds paper one line The printer can be set through the configuration menu to ignore or use this command Some applications expect the command to be ignored while others use it as print command Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp HOD Related Information See Ignoring Using the Carriage Return in Diagnostics for more information Carriage Return Line Feed prints and feeds only one line Feed n Print Lines ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Value of n Range of n DCAn 14n 20n The number of lines to feed at current line height setting 0 127 7156 Emulation Mode 0 255 7158 Native Mode or 7167 Native Mode Feeds paper lines at the current line height without printing Ignored on receipt if the current line is not empty Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H14 a
56. right justified PDF417 and Code 93 are only available in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode November 2002 179 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select Bar Code Width ASCII GSwn Hexadecimal 1D77n Decimal 29 119 7 Value of n 1 2 3 4 5 Default 3 for receipt 2 for slip Sets the bar code width to n dots Formulas n 1 8 mm n 1 208 inch for receipt n 1 5 7 mm n 1 144 inch for slip Slip module sizing n must be even it is rounded up if odd and the size of modules is n 1 5 7 mm n 1 144 inch Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H77 amp Chr n 180 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Page Mode Commands Page Mode is one of two modes which the 7167 printer uses to operate Standard Mode is typical of how most printers operate by printing data as it is received and feeding paper as the various paper feed commands are received Page Mode is different in that it processes or prepares the data as a page in memory before it prints it Think of this as a virtual page The page can be any area within certain parameters that you define Once the printer receives the 0x0C command it prints the page and returns the printer to Standard Mode The Select Page Mode command 1B 4C puts the printer into Page Mode Any commands that are received are interpreted as Page Mode commands Several commands react differently when in Standard Mode and Page Mode The d
57. sectors between user data storage and logos user defined characters This allocation is saved in the EEPROM of the printer and is therefore saved across power cycles n1 n2 lt 6 3M The 7167 has been configured at the factory with 2M of Flash memory If n1 n2 is greater than the maximum number of sectors available the command is ignored Reissuing this command with different parameters will erase all sectors Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H22 amp Chr amp H55 amp Chr amp Hn1 amp Chr Hn2 Exception This is command is available only in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Erase User Flash Sector ASCI GS n Hexadecimal 1D 407 Decimal 29 64 n Value ofn 49 50 Erases a page of Flash Memory and sends a carriage return when the operation is complete n 49 ASCII n 1 This command erases all sectors available for user defined characters and multiple logos The page should be erased in two situations when the logo definition area is full and an application is attempting to define new logos and when an application wants to replace one user defined character set with another In both cases all logos and character set definitions are erased and must be redefined n 50 ASCII n 2 This command erases all sectors available for user data storage Important While erasing Flash Memory the printer disables all int
58. select the default code page These are the code pages available for printing Code page 437 US English Code page 850 Multilingual Code page 852 Slavic Code page 858 with Euo symbol Code page 860 Portuguese Code page 862 Hebrew Code page 863 French Canadian Code page 864 Arabic Code page 865 Nordic Code page 866 Cyrillic Code page 874 Thai Code page 1252 Windows Latin 1 November 2002 70 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics Code page Katakana Code page 932 MS Japan Space page Note For Asian code pages code page 936 949 or 950 replaces code page 932 Only one Asian code page either 932 936 949 950 will exist in firmware Press the Paper Feed Button for the Default Code Page you want SET CODE PAGE YES Long Click NO Short Click FOR 7158 Mode Code Page 437 gt 1 Click Code Page 850 gt 2 Clicks Code Page 852 gt 3 Clicks Code Page 858 gt 4 Clicks More Options 5 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate Code Page 860 gt 1 Click Code Page 862 gt 2 Clicks Code Page 863 3 Clicks Code Page 864 gt 4 Clicks More Options 5 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate Code Page 865 1 Click Code Page 866 gt 2 Clicks Code Page 874 gt 3 Clicks Code Page 1252 gt 4 Clicks More Options 5 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to v
59. sequences are recommended to avoid possible misinterpretation of a DLE 0x10 sequence as a Clear Printer 0x10 0 ASCII DLE NUL command An application using these GS 1D sequences does not need to distinguish for the printer between the new real time commands and the Clear Printer command This implementation is ideal for an existing 7156 application that already uses the Clear Printer command or for a new application being developed Alternate Implementation The alternate implementation uses the DLE 0x10 sequences as implemented on other printers An application using these DLE 0x10 sequences and the original 7156 Clear Printer command 0x10 must distinguish for the printer between the new real time commands and the Clear Printer command by adding a NUL 0x00 to the Clear Printer command An application using these DLE 0x10 sequences must also send the second byte of the sequence within 100 milliseconds of the first to prevent the first byte being mistaken for a Clear Printer command Rules for Using Real Time Commands Three situations must be understood when using real time commands First the printer executes the Real Time command upon receiving it and will transmit status regardless of the condition of the DSR signal Second the printer transmits status whenever it recognizes a Real Time Status Transmission command sequence even if that sequence happens to occur naturally within the data of another command such as gra
60. serial number 10 Business or commercial check 11 Amount field present November 2002 193 7167 Owner s Manual 194 Chapter 6 Commands Field Separator Field separator preceded by a single quote so a field separator of the letter A would be sent as A 0x27 0x41 If a Carriage Return is specified as a separator 0x27 0x0D a final Carriage Return must still terminate the parsing parameter string Country Code Un One Digit Returned N returned if US check Nothing returned if not US check Country Code Km One Digit Returned M returned if Canadian check Nothing returned if not Canadian check Check Type L One Digit Returned 1 Personal check 2 Business or commercial check Ten parameters are more than enough to specify all variable length fields with a field separator each and other status information that may be helpful to an application More than 10 parameters are not recommended because they use up space in non volatile memory NVRAM available for the exception table The parsing parameter string is stored packed in NVRAM starting at word 10 with the total byte length stored in the high order byte of word 10 While most parameters take two bytes of NVRAM the following parameters take only one byte B D E S L None of the parsing examples in the following section take more than 14 bytes seven words of NVRAM The exception table starts at word 20 If the parsing parameter string extends into word 20 then the
61. that simulates standard serial communications in Windows 98 SR2 Windows 98 USB Hot Patch ID Q236934 NT 4 0 Service Pack 3 or higher and Windows 2000 Application developers need only redirect their software to the virtual serial ports created by the NCR USB solution to use the printer November 2002 17 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Checking for USB Support on the Host Computer If the USB interface communications is required the host computer must be equipped and setup properly If it is not you need to install a USB interface card With the required hardware in place Windows 98 SR 2 Windows 98 USB Hot Patch ID 236934 NT 4 0 Service Pack 3 or higher and Windows 2000 natively support plug and play USB with a built in driver Windows NT does not and the NCR windows NT USB driver needs to be installed IMPORTANT You need to have internet access to download the USB drivers from the NCR Web site www NCR com Host Configuration Verify that the proper hardware has been installed in the host terminal Windows 98 1 Open the Control Panel 2 Click on System Windows 98 3 Click the Device Manager tab 4 In the Device Manager window scroll down the list of installed hardware devices until you find an entry for Universal serial bus controller If this entry exists your host computer is set up for USB operation If this entry does not appear e Consult your computer do
62. the Paper Feed Button 4 Allcode pages will be printed 5 Go to step 2 again to repeat this test To exit the Slip Test Mode 1 Enter the Configuration Menu again 2 Disable the Slip Test Mode November 2002 61 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics 3 Exit the Configuration Menu The printer is in the Normal Mode and can communicate with the host computer Receipt Test Mode To run the Receipt Test Mode 1 Enable the Receipt Test Mode through the Configuration Menu See Configuring the Printer for instructions on how to enter the Configuration Menu 2 Push Paper Feed Button and the receipt station will print all code pages 3 The test ends with a cut 4 Go to step 2 again to repeat this test To exit the Receipt Test Mode 1 Enter the Configuration Menu again 2 Disable the Receipt Test Mode 3 Exitthe Configuration Menu The printer is in Normal Mode and can communicate with the host computer MICR Test Mode MICR Test Mode allows the user to test whether the MICR is operating correctly When the printer is in this mode the MICR reads characters on a cheque as usual but instead of transmitting the values to the software it prints on receipt paper To run the MICR Test Mode 1 Enter the Configuration Menu See Configuring the Printer for instructions on how to enter the Configuration Menu 2 After enabling the MICR Test Mode through the Configuration Menu exit the Configuration Men
63. the equipment Note This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense Communication Cables Shielded communication cables must be used with this unit to ensure compliance with the Class A FCC limits Information to User This equipment must be installed and used in strict accordance with the manufacturer s instructions However there is no guarantee that interference to radio communications will not occur in a particular commercial installation If this equipment does cause interference which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to contact NCR immediately The NCR company is not responsible for any radio or television interference caused by unauthorized modification of this equipment or the substitution or attachment of connecting cables and equipment other than those specified by NCR The correction of inte
64. thermal printer to 58mm or 80mm wide Press the Paper Feed Button for the paper width option you want SET PAPER WIDTH YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Paper Width 80 mm gt 1 Click Paper Width 58 mm gt 2 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Knife Option This option makes it possible to set the Knife Option if it is installed in the printer This setting should only be changed is the option is added or removed November 2002 68 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics Press the Paper Feed Button for the option you want SET KNIFE OPTION YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Enable Knife gt Long Disable Knife gt Short Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection MICR Option This function makes it possible to set the MICR Option if it is installed in the printer This setting should only be changed if the option is added or removed Press the Paper Feed Button for the option you want SET MICR OPTION YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Enable MICR gt Long Disable MICR gt Short Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Check Flip Option This function makes it possible to set the Check Flip Option if it is installed in the printer This sett
65. 0 CULIOIFROttVY REF FET 70 80 H AG2 pike A RSA O A 212522 KERER bo ERARIO REENER E0 SAFARIS AIEN RR ES FO BLEAK SPS A940 ASFF 40 DRE EE EAR ERE SO LFS Mi Hoos RAT HG 60 EFEFEF AEETI dr e m 70 AYE US pi sene J OA LAT A0 ARD BE rs Erit t BO co Ee ruant T EME Erie cun TEURIL FRERARAL E0 ARE BARA AAT EE FO ORE ONE E ES kS E A640 A6FF 40 MEM I EL ERE 90 EA EAE 60 JEEE E PETERE 70 TS ES E es ue A0 LENA BO ERREN FRIT CO LOU SRARRER ERAGE DO BRUT EAD Es ss EO HRES FO ea eee aaa BR A740 A7FF 40 Oe as eee 50 a eee HESS EE 60 TERRES EE BH evomIRIA 70 TRALEE SER BOR RCA eR RD SUD S AM aa BO PRE See Eee NIRE CO RRS SE pal MY D DO imu DEOR RRR EER EQ BETREE A ARIE FO ROSSER 3 November 2002 Appendix C 267 7167 Owner s Manual Code Pare 949 Traditional Chinese Cont A840 ASFF RY RR OUNCE RIK yt hyg PER Ht HAASE PR RES BT 2 MARARS A SHELA ER SERSECURARERS ES BESTE amp HOES REH pou Poi hid ga Bt ta aie ES Ht Lk eR Co ESI TE 4 7 Aer RJRUSISISIA 20802 6 ss SE E ESTO RV JR SPORE A940 ASFF PROS pps remp S ee f r dts SS CE T EITPDIE REEL T Wn AER RIEA UU RRP R MEE S EL EE 28 fal IE Fons s n ns IE pq ras JL AE C E RTS SERERE P MEER OU Ba BR Pr aT eet Re PRB RPE TEP HTP TR a
66. 00 SAAS AER BTA EO AIETE EAA KIT HEAT IN IR FO ROMULI LRL ATA REOR F140 F1FF November 2002 264 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page Traditional Chinese Cont F440 F4FF A0 BRXBMBIBURTERICTIRRETURAEI HE 80 ed At ALL CO PRR ERS PEK SEAS M NUS Fim me BAB o FO RRR RMI SD Appendix C F540 FSFF B ea te E Ait ke BE SEAR REL ib ES E mul RB HEIR SR E eb ub TAR ARE RR AR ERE md November 2002 265 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 949 Korean Cont FA40 FAFF 40 50 60 70 90 A0 THERE IRIS ES BO MHZ EAE IO Te d CUR F E CO Fab Ar ME E EE EER DO EAZCHPRRAR LUE Sx RRA She EC Ee BY EO MUR NM i A BES gt T LX FO ERRAR ep Se RA 701 22 FC40 FCFF A0 BARC ERE NE SS ERE BO Wie Se 5 A SR A Oe 4B A IARI Se CO Pun au Av qua DO SWRA a M DE TCR DELE E0 MAMADA EA AAA E TE FO Rar SS 5 aE a ae T a A FB40 FBFF AO FERSEN a TR RED BO ABS SE AROS WOR NG HE F E OAS CO IKLA M Ct sete oS DO SAUL SRE ATANA E TEER ELE 8 450 FO SAIRA SAAT AT RL SNC ROA FD40 FDFF 40 50 60 70 A0 3888881612 GUNES TPR BO FAS AMS AR I RE Fi CO MRF Re ae se Si ae IR RE DO gt HA Fe Le Ba AR RT eT TOS hz EO WEARS Capua A Oe bu FO SERERE E E November 2002 Appendix C 266 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 950 Traditional Chinese A140 AIFF A240 A2FF 40 N N Ft F 50 DD hera arr x amp C Er i ae A440 AFF 40 eZTuSwvr AJLAJUVZIZI 50 EThREKEEYANALBET 6
67. 114n Value of n 0 Black 1 2nd Color Default 0 Black Selects color printing Color printing is valid for character graphics logo and barcodes Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H72 amp Chr n Exceptions The command is valid only for receipt station Select or Cancel Upside Down Printing Mode ASCII ESC n Hexadecimal 1B7Bn Decimal 27123n Value of n 0 Cancel 1 Set Default 0 Cancel Prints upside down characters The character order is inverted in the buffer so text is readable The command remains in effect until the Rotated Print 1B 12 command is received Only bit 0 is used Bits 1 7 are not used See Summary of Rotated Printing in this document for more information 136 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Example MSComm41 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H7B amp Chr n Exceptions The command is valid only at the beginning of a line The Rotated Print command 1B 12 cancels this command Select Character Size ASCII GS n Hexadecimal 1D 21 n Decimal 2933 7 Value of n 1 8 vertical number of times normal font 1 8 horizontal number of times normal font Range of n 00 07 10 17 70 77 Default of n 0 Selects the character height using bits 0 to 2 and selects the character width using bits 4 to 7 as follows Character Width Selection Hex Decimal Width 00 0 1 normal 10 16 2 t
68. 1D4CnL nH Decimal 2976 nLnH Range of nL 0 255 Range of nH 0 255 Default 80 mm width 576 dots the maximum printable area 58 mm width 424 dots the maximum printable area Sets the left margin of the printing area The left margin is set to nH X 256 nL times horizontal motion unit inches The horizontal motion units are set by the Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units command 1D 50 described in this manual The width of the printing area is set by the Set Printing Area Width command 1D 57 which follows this command See the Set Printing Area Width command 1D 57 in this document for a description of that command If the setting exceeds the printable area the maximum value of the printable area is used The maximum printable area is 576 dots See the illustration Formulas To set the left margin to one inch at the default horizontal motion unit of 1 203 inches send the four byte string GS L 203 0 Or to set the left margin to two inches at the default horizontal motion unit of 1 203 units per inch send the four byte string GS L 150 1 Where 2 inches 406 203 and 406 1 X 256 150 lt T Printable area 576 dots for 80 mm width 424 dots for 58 mm width Left margin gt lt Printing area width 95 Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H4C amp Chr nL amp Chr nH Exceptions The command is effective only at the beginning of a
69. 213 1B 5C n1 n2 Set Relative Print Position 117 1B61n Select Justification 118 1B 63 30 n Select Receipt or Slip for Printing Slip for 94 MICR Read 1B 6331n Select Receipt or Slip for Setting Line Spacing 96 November 2002 75 7167 Owner s Manual 76 Chapter 6 Commands Hexadecimal Command Page Code and Operands Command Name 1B 63 347 Select Sensors to Stop Printing 97 1B 63 35 n Enable or Disable Panel Buttons 98 1B 64n Print and Feed n Lines 111 1B 63 37 n Enable or Disable Slip Paper End Feeding Stop 99 1B 65n Print and Reverse Feed n Lines 111 1B66mn Set Slip Paper Waiting Time 100 1B 69 Perform Full Knife Cut 92 1B6Ak Read from Non Volatile Memory 202 1B 6D Perform Partial Cut 92 1B 70 n p1 p2 Generate Pulse to Open Cash Drawer 101 1B 72n Select Print Color 136 1B73n1n2k Write to Non Volatile Memory NVRAM 202 1B 74n Select International Character Set 134 1B 750 Transmit Peripheral Device Status 152 1B 76 Transmit Printer Status 152 1B 77 01 Read MICR Data and Transmit 191 1B 77 46 Check Flip 200 1B 77 50 Define Parsing Format Save in NVRAM 192 1B 77 52 Reread MICR Data 191 1B 77 70 Define Parsing Format Do Not Save 192 Permanently 1B7An Select or Cancel Parallel Printing Mode on R amp J 102 1B7Bn Select or Cancel Upside Down Printing Mode 136 1C Select Slip Station 102 1C21n Select print modes for
70. 4 dots in character cell 17 characters columns per line Graphics 424 addressable bits The minimum print line height is 24 dots for characters and 24 dots for graphics The standard print line height is 27 dots 3 38 mm 133 inches for characters with three extra dot rows See the following illustration not to scale November 2002 221 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix B Print Characteristics roper Width 58 mm 2 28 inc Top Margin 17 5 mm 69 in Minimum Print Zone 53 05 mm 2 09 in 424 Dots Left and Right Margins 2 47 mm 10 in Slip Station The slip station prints characters standard pitch and compressed pitch and graphics in a print zone of 82 2 mm 3 24 inches wide on a slip or form Standard pitch 45 characters columns per line Compressed pitch 55 characters columns per line Double byte character 27 characters columns per line The print line height of 10 half dot x 7 dot characters is 2 46 mm 097 in With three dot spacing the print line height is 3 53 mm 139 inches See the following illustration not to scale To print as close to the bottom of the slip as possible without the slip leaving the feed rollers use the Print and Feed n Lines 1B 64 n with n 0 2 Paper Width Not Restricted os Top Margin 16 mm 63 in Minimum Without Reverse Feed No Top Margin with Reverse Feed Print Zone 82 2 mm 3 24 in Left and Right Margins 3 2 mm 125 in Bottom Margin
71. 7156 Emulation Mode 15n Feed n Dot Rows This command will move the paper on the receipt in n 208 inch steps instead of n 152 inch steps 16n Add n Extra Dot Rows The dot rows will be measured in n 208 inches versus n 152 inches 1B20n Set Right Side Character Spacing This command sets the right side spacing to n horizontal motion units By default these units are in terms of 1 208 inches versus 1 152 inches 1B 24 n1 n2 Set Absolute Starting Position For graphics commands the position is scaled to best match the previous product In text mode the equivalent character position is calculated 1B 26 s c1 c2 n1 d1 nn dn Define User Defined Character Set Since the dots on the new print head are smaller user defined characters that were used on the previous 7156 printer will appear smaller on the 7156 printer 1B 2A m n1 n2 dl dn Select Bit Image Mode In 7156 Emulation Mode graphics are scaled to best match the size of the graphic in the 7156 printer 1B 33 n Set Line Spacing This command uses n in terms of n 360 inches Since the previous product had a fundamental step of 1 180 inch and the new product has a fundamental step of 1 203 inch the actual line spacing will not exactly match the requested spacing 1B4A n Print and Feed Paper Same as above November 2002 87 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands
72. 75 inches long Side insertion minimum 203 mm 8 0 inches wide 51 mm 2 0 inches long Single ply forms should be on paper that is greater than 15 pounds Multiple part forms up to five parts should be no thicker than 406 mm 016 inches If multi part formare used the cardstock must be the last ply of the form To order forms contact your sales representative or order from NCR at the following address or toll free number NCR Media Products Division 9995 Washington Church Road Miamisburg OH 45342 Voice 1 800 543 8130 toll free or local listing of The NCR Media Products sales office Ordering Ribbon Cassettes To order ribbon cassettes contact your sales representative or order from NCR at the following address or toll free number NCR Media Products Division 9995 Washington Church Road Miamisburg OH 45342 Voice 1 800 543 8130 toll free or local listing of Media Products sales office Stock Numbers purple ribbon cassette 8 million characters 127022 black ribbon cassette 5 million characters 127035 6 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Ordering Other Supplies Contact your NCR sales representative to order the supplies listed in the table Item Power supply with attached cable to printer and U S power supply cord Power supply w o power cord Power supply cord to outlet RS 232C Communication Cables 9 pin to 9 pin 9 pin to 9 pin DC Plus Power Cable DC Power from NC
73. 9 0 characters per inch 56 columns Resident bar codes e Code 39 e Code 93 e Code 128 e UPC A e UPC E JANS EAN JANI3 EAN e Interleaved 2 of 5 e Codabar e PDF417 Drop in paper loading requiring no spindle or threading paper Paper low indicator Paper exhaust indicator Bi directional impact printing Standard pitch host selectable 13 9 characters per inch 45 columns Compressed pitch host selectable 17 1 characters per inch 55 columns Printing of forms up to five plies e Front insertion of forms with forms stop e Side insertion of forms with override of forms stop e Automatic and manual insertion of forms Form alignment sensors and Slip In LED indicator Horizontal flat bed slip table with optional extension standard with MICR check reader Snap on ribbon cassette Resident bar codes e Code 39 e Code 93 e Code 128 e UPC A e UPC E JAN8 EAN e JAN13 EAN e Interleaved 2 of 5 e Codabar November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 1 About the 7167 Printer Receipt and Slip Print Stations General Features Options Variety of print modes double high receipt station only double strike slip station only double wide upside down and rotated 14 resident character language Code Pages e PC Code Page 437 US English e PC Code Page 850 Multilingual e PC Code Page 852 Slavic e PC Code Page 858 with Euo symbol e PC Code Page 860 Portuguese e PC Code Page 862 Hebrew e PC Cod
74. AFF RB abe Nn RPKE N RMIIK S BRASS ter 24 x an HIAL OM HN KTN m m la QO it bUs h5nbb 56 writ 252 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix C Code Page 949 Korean Cont AC40 ACFF AD40 ADFF 40 50 gt 60 en 70 7 2 80 A0 ABBFAEEX3UAKNMH b BO ONPCTY DOXUYWWE bl b 3 BO CO WA 2 DO aGBrae8oxxzavnAknMaH DO E0 onpetryp gt xy umd bb 3 EO FO on FO BeOS DERE AF40 AFFF 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 30 80 90 90 AQ A0 BO B0 CO CO DO DO EO EO FQ FO 8040 BOFF B140 BIFF 40 40 20 50 60 60 10 70 80 90 AO pabzigrergtaszizigiiziztaiay EE EE LI T 22 a 214 E BO ww2l2i282 20 002120202 2 2 gl EE Pe Caer DEL C SEBELAEEEEEEEBEE CO gEIXTAGIA 32 DO 2312 33302120134 21 21212 2 24 21 23 23 DO azzzuzalecsaunu8x E0 8gdgdosgouddolssc EO 3j3 2 2 zi 2 ai zi zj212 2 2 mz FO Badrdssossicg FO aiezHggi2i d 2 2 2 go Pal November 2002 253 Appendix C B340 B3FF Code Page 949 Korean Cont 7167 Owner s Manual B240 B2FF JN US O IE use TRE g qmm Ha AEST SSD r a A x HH 439338551 ROW T0 3 RCWCIUST EN B540 BSFF B740 B7FF B440 B4FF B640 B6FF T GE ai Car 254 November 2002 Appendix C B940 B9FF 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 949 Korean Cont B340 BSFF Dor nU St ON ae ol peas Of esol 213251 BB40 BBFF BD40 BDFF BA40 BAFF BC40 BCFF quur 302r 3H EX HF 3r uH EET 341x038 ES 34r GNI su xnzr d EXHI ZADEK AREP qu T XCMRg 4H REM III KAT W
75. BURMA Ae PRR ERE f XEM FO REAREARR RATER EA40 EAFF 40 50 60 70 AO DATI SENSE LKB N NE eae heehee NA CO IRIIYENWCUS SAU 88 e WS 5 8 DO ER AP RU Ws Be a On RA S EO SOS Mar Meneame a EOS HE Re eres A EC40 ECFF 40 50 60 70 A0 HM RS Rabe S BO sESUENURISSIRAISRIN OO CO RHRKEEHIINWASIHUM DO KA ETE SUN EA EO BARELEEREETKUMUMI kR a as FO iR E ERENES AAIEN AH Appendix C E940 ESFF AQ dete pet pelted te beled BO RAPHE RW ee co TEL FOREN TRIB T 158 F EO 84222 AM RST i SST HSER S ARNE FO SHEA RRA aE EB40 EBFF AQ RIOR ACHE h a TR RAE De BO MOBIRHEUZERIR A 1538 3L te CO iL Ue ANNIA DO ped ALAS MC BREAD EO Li Her TA FO drin WERSMMEN RESET ED40 EDFF November 2002 263 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 949 Korean Cont EE40 EEFF AO todd aet MR E Phebe debe EL wee n EEEE i TRE i DIU SER ROO O MR Ta Dima eS FO SSRT8 USACN RRR F040 FOFF 40 50 60 70 AQ RAR il Bh On i T5 05 0818 2E Ac SE BO PERPE Bae Bi eR We Ie BEER A JD EZ CO mATORSINNIIGNCEBSR DO TUB ROUES METUS BMC M AUR AB EO ier MEME FO SHE tS tipo AS AR A F240 F2FF 40 50 60 70 A0 Het nee licut BO RAVER ALNEAR HS BK E Te A a a ME UL CO iE AUF a ee te DO RH SER MARAM RY EO Be WINS Fri OUP OR RS ea EIN FO AERAR Sh Appendix C EF40 EFFF 40 50 60 70 AQ RSPR fa A A AES REN SG BO PPESMRENEEREECU EEA A MAE CO ETE te AGMA J He FFA
76. Ca LLi LL C O O O O O O O O O OO OO O C OO O A VEC uo e gt C Q E e c L Ep OO P h D O S QC E ot L k OEE iM i on ie IS ni Oar Se FI r O O I iC Zm o VOT On X v oA b aL O O OD 02 dH O D Ca SC CO D O0 O0 4O lt O 4D da D O lt lt gt G Oe D gt Z x ANY ee a Goo 00 e Oo T ECO a cr ordre lt gt gt N lt B lt n cD Y LLI LL OTH O gt lt _ J Z o CO r3 CN CO ST iD O F 00 C s V H A ERJ o x 1 Code Page 864 Code Page 863 23456789ABCDEF 2 3God 545 Pu 9 AB DEF 20 Y SH DSH ADA B PPE MT Yt Hh q 7B T 4 5 1993449 3 G a a f X Oo Bere bq be 323 t 4 4 r ir de w 0 w gt cree FAR ove tod Ca 0 d Hd 23 Dd www CL 8 OHNE oz 2 gt A aA 7 o c me BR oe oR A a O O L YY 5 gt SF K ANS Os lt q G O O G OY Of ECO D G C Or 3X x hc lt I Gb lt mQ CO Oulu 5 T 2 gt 1 ZO OrAN CO ST ID WM OM V H A TEGO wak l P AE VI 3 aa ss gt c a B OM E VL O CX Pe DD O B Qc ik Ea i e a E Z po I H e H A Br F rr r r fort ok ops mf da 1 f OR ovy SOR Wala Cd C3 03 nd O C4 OD PGC Ce OO D 4D o O Q Ut OP Des X gt N am a Gn O G m mnywe O amp C CC 02 T gt Po 25 lt Gb Y c0 O CQ uit
77. Chapter 6 Commands FS Turn underline mode ON OFF for Kanji ASCII FS n Hexadecimal 1C2Dn Decimal 2845n Value of n 0 Cancel 1 1 dot height underline 2 2 dot height underline Default n 0 Cancel Turn underline mode on or off for Asian character All characters could be underlined including character right side spacing Underline can be selected by FS and ESC also the last received command is effective Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1C amp Chr amp H2D amp Chr n Define user defined Kanji characters ASCII FS2c1c2 dl dn Hexadecimal 1C 32 c1 c2 d1 dn Decimal 2850c1c2 dl dn Value of c1 Specified the beginning Asian character code Value of c2 Specified the end Asian character code Value of d Image data 210 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Range of c1 c2 Japanese F0 lt cls F9 40 lt c2 lt 7E and 80s CP932 c2 lt FC Simplified Als cls AZ 40 lt c2 lt 7E and 80 lt Chinese c2 lt AO AA lt c1 lt AF A1 lt c2 lt CP936 FE F8 lt cl lt FE A1 lt c2 lt FE Korean cl C9 and c1 FE A1 lt c2 lt FE CP949 Traditional 81 lt cl lt A0and FA lt c1 lt FE 40 lt Chinese c2 lt 7Eand 80 lt c2 lt FE CP950 C7 lt c1 lt C8 A1 lt c2 lt FE Defines and enters downloaded characters into RAM The user defined character will be cleared by ESC or power off of printer Each character requires 72 bytes for charac
78. Code page 832 E5 40 SRA AXE 50 py RE h a YE x ELI Seat SS 52 ol Weta SS BIE SH Code page 932 E7 40 MES Te BG RA S OR IB REA HE SO PASE EAA Ei BaD DEUM en SS OS a 60 SSL Wi Pee oo es a GEOR ara a SU 70 WASH WE ERGESE SRR RIT AS EHE 80 REIES ENARA hw 90 EARNAN RE S MON AO WP re D n BO Mee IMG s pe d CO MOSPEIBLASBHEKAS aya DO Api AN LL U Slip MAREM PERE 2 GR GA oh RSH SE 2 92 C 16 0106 Sh FO KSEE ARISA E 10252583 November 2002 Appendix C 236 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 932 Cont Code page 932 E8 8385518055 AI Ie LER EE IR ES QU id PELURIT EOD EE MH FERE UTE VE BR Phi m pi x LO SAX F ba Ei 5 LE Lid Li A Frink a3 ne a i a Seta te Code page 932 EA 18 FEAR AR DR BR ER SAARMA SR REA RA HNA HASE BA EN e Ee AR E FE Se BS UDERFEMEEEUEE AR HARRAN ROMERE AA MAER BE FL PART ZT HE hirsas asuaka Code page 932 EE JR E A TAIR ITR A ERARE RIRAN ME S 868 SEAM ES CZ RETIRER ML MERE MUSAE RO KE e SEDE PUL CE Cae cae IUO ERE BET EL I He RARESA U A818 828 2 2 86 138 SF SE SR SOR 9 et t GH GB GB SD SS Sit BR SF DN Sit BE 538 437 28 18 35 2 SR M CR LR S A DRE A IS UR TE Oe te em We TARA RR Os PEE ESAS RAAT RAE AE A 8 ATA DAR i ii fii iv v vi vii vi ix x Y YY Code page 932 E9 BR 58 A U Rs ARAL OE REX FS B 82 A ee A a AA AE 8 s IEE TCR BOY BB RZ E BA EIER RE EK SE RH AR ERR SE See BR EARE SA Hh Oe UERN AR SUS AM RT S RAE munus
79. DE gt Long Click 7158 7156 MODE gt Short Click Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Receipt Synchronization Mode The standard mode for synchronization allows for verification of each line printed to the host When the receipt synchronization is disabled the printer will allow for maximum print speed and ignore the verificaiton of each line printed November 2002 66 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics Press the Paper Feed Button for the receipt synchronization mode option you want SET RECEIPT SYNCHRONIZATON MODE YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Enable Receipt Sync gt Long Click Disable Receipt Sync gt Short Click Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Save Parameters This function allows to save the selected emulations software settings or return to the emulations software settings to select additional options Press the Paper Feed Button for the option you want Save new parameters YES gt Long Click NO MODIFY gt Short Click Hardware Options Print Density This function makes it possible to adjust the energy level of the print head to darken the printout An adjustment should only be made when necessary The factory setting is 100 Warning Choose an energy level no higher than necessary to achieve a dark printout Failure to observe this rule may result in a printer servi
80. Decimal 2774n Value of n 1 203 inches receipt 1 144 inches slip Range of n 0 255 Prints one line from the buffer and feeds the paper On the receipt station the line height equals the character height when n is too small This does not apply to the slip station Use n 0 to print a line without feeding the paper This allows the printer to print on the last line of the slip at 59 inches from the trailing edge and still retain the slip in the feed rollers for reverse feeding the paper back out of the slip station Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H4A amp Chr n Related Information For more information see the description of the Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units command in this document Print and Reverse Feed Paper ASCII ESCKn Hexadecimal 1B4Bn Decimal 2775n Value of n Slip 1 144 of an inch Range of n 0 255 Prints one line from the buffer and reverse feeds the paper 1 144 of an inch on the slip station Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H4B amp Chr n Exceptions The receipt station cannot be reverse fed November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Print and Feed n Lines ASCII ESCdn Hexadecimal 1B64n Decimal 27100n Value of n Number of lines to be printed and fed Range ofn 1 255 0 is interpreted as 1 on the receipt station Prints one line from the buffer and feeds paper n lines at the current line heigh
81. Density Mode Receipt Only Top of Bit Image MSB dn LSB November 2002 145 7167 Owner s Manual 146 Chapter 6 Commands Select Double Density Graphics ASCII ESC Y n1 n2 dl dn or ESC L n1 n2 d1 dn Hexadecimal 1B 59 n1 n2 d1 dn or 1B 4C n1 n2 d1 dn Decimal 27 89 n1 n2 d1 dn or 27 76 n1 n2 d1 dn Value of n Value of n 8 Dot Single Value of n 24 Dot Single Density Mode Density Mode Value of d n1 256 x n2 3 x n1 256 x n2 Number of Bytes of Data Printed Down Then Across Enters one line of 7 slip in 7156 mode or 8 dot double density graphics into the print buffer Any print command is required to print the line after which the printer returns to normal processing mode The number of bytes sent is represented by the formulas in the table Each bit corresponds to one horizontal dot Compare to Set Bit Image Mode 1B 2A m 1 earlier in this document Exception 1B 4C n1 n2 d1 dn is only valid in 7156 Emulation Mode Select the Current Logo Downloaded Bit Image ASCII GS n Hexadecimal 1D23n Decimal 2935n Range ofn 0 255 Selects a logo to be defined or printed The active logo n remains in use until this command is sent again with a different logo n When this command precedes a logo definition that definition is stored in Flash Memory as logo n If there is already a different definition in Flash Memory for logo n the first is inactivated and the new d
82. Drawer 2 Solenoid HN aj SP wo N Ground Status Switch Return November 2002 77 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Communication Switch Settings The DIP switches are located on the PC board at the back of the printer as shown in the illustration in Level 1 Diagnostics in chapter 4 The switches are used to put the printer into various modes for printer configuration set up DIP Switch Switch 1 is shown in the OFF position Use a paper clip or other pointed object to set the switches 1 Set the switches to the desired settings shown in the table 2 Resetthe printer Caution Setting switch 1 to On puts the printer in level 1 diagnostics setup mode where other functions and tests can be changed DIP Switch Settings for RS 232C Parameters Switch 1 Switch 2 Setting Printer State Setting OFF 0 OFF 0 On line Mode default ON 1 OFF 0 Diagnostic Mode OFF 0 ON 1 Flash Download Mode ON 1 ON 1 Vendor Adjustment Mode Setting Extra RS 232C Options The following extra options are available for the RS 232C Interface Data errors e Print for data errors default e Ignore data errors November 2002 78 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Chapter 6 Commands Introduction The different features and functions provided by the printer are controlled by sending commands from the host computer to the printer This section describes the commands that are supported by the printer The print
83. Edgeport Drivers for Windows NT 4 0 Inside Out Networks Edgeport Drivers Setup x Inside Out Networks Software License Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement Inside Out Networks Edgeport for NT 4 0 License Agreement IMPORTANT READ CAREFULLY This Inside Qut Networks Edgeport License Agreement Agreement is a legal agreement between you either an individual or a single entity and Inside Out Networks Incorporated IONETWORKS for IDNETwW ORKS computer software and associated media collectively the Licensed Software By continuing to use the Licensed Software you agree to be bound by the terms of this amp greement Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you choose No the setup will close To install Inside Dut Networks Edgeport Drivers you must accept this agreement ImstallsHeld November 2002 27 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Inside Out Networks Release Notes Pstallsreld Information Windows 2000 Follow the on screen instructions The printer beeps when the USB device is recognized Go to the location where you downloaded the drivers and double click the file 28 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New ey Hardware Wizard SS This wizard helps you install a device driver for a
84. FF protocol 74 November 2002 Index 5
85. H1D amp Chr amp H56 amp Chr m amp Chr n Exceptions If m is out of the specified range the command is ignored November 2002 103 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select Receipt Station ASCII RS Hexadecimal 1E Decimal 30 Selects the Receipt Station for all functions The receipt station is the default setting after the printer is initialized or the Clear Printer 0x10 command is received The Hex command 1B 63 30 n where n 1 2 3 will also select the receipt station Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1E Print Test Form ASCII USt Hexadecimal 1F 74 Decimal 31116 Prints the current printer configuration settings on the receipt Disabled in page mode Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1F amp Chr amp H74 104 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Vertical Positioning and Print Commands The vertical positioning and print commands control the vertical print positions of characters on the receipt and slip Print and Feed Paper One Line ASCII LF Hexadecimal OA Decimal 10 Prints one line from the buffer and feeds paper one line Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H0A Related Information Carriage Return Line Feed prints and feeds only one line Print and Eject Slip ASCII FF Hexadecimal 0C Decimal 12 Prints data from the buffer to the slip station and if the paper sensor is covered reverses the slip out the front of the
86. II ESC n Hexadecimal 1B 3Fn Decimal 2763n Value of n Specified character code Range of n 32 255 Cancels the pattern defined for the character code specified by n After the user defined character is canceled the corresponding pattern from Code Page 437 is printed Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H3F amp Chr n Exceptions This command is ignored if n is out of range or if the user defined character is not defined Select or Cancel Emphasized Mode ASCII ESCEn Hexadecimal 1B45n Decimal 27 69 Value of n 0 bit 0 not selected 1 bit 0 selected Range of n 0 255 Default 0 bit 0 Starts or stops emphasized printing on slip and receipt In Emphasized Mode on the slip each line is printed twice to improve penetration of multi part forms and increase print contrast The second pass is printed the same direction as the first to ensure accuracy of the overprint Printing speed decreases due to the second printing pass November 2002 131 7167 Owner s Manual 132 Chapter 6 Commands Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H45 amp Chr n Exceptions Only the lowest bit of n is effective Emphasized printing cannot be used with bit images or downloaded bit images Related Information This command and the Select Print Mode s command 1B 21 function identically Select Double Strike 7156 Emulation 7158 Native and 7167 Native Mode ASCII ESCG ESC Gn H
87. Loading and Changing the Receipt Paper sess Removing the Paper Roll 0 Loading the Paper Roll ere teta metto oet eati rte Advancing Papeterie ree e eed ed rerit ed Installing and Changing the Ribbon Cassette sss Removing the Ribbon Cassette Installing the Ribbon Cassette an eene Printing on Forms OoFChecks eret ote enr erbe ri rad Validating and Verifying CheckKS 4 Chapter 3 Solving Problems Green LED Does Not Come On Printer Will Not Print Green LED Blinking Slow aa s e tr metri ott rer err epa Green LED Blinking Fast sss Slip or Forms Printing is Light nee Receipt Printing is Light or Spotty sss LED Slip Table Does Not Come On Forms Skew or Catch oen iere PI re to sna MICR Check Reader Not Reading Propetrly sse Other Serious Problems ete eee e ni Contacting a Service Representative sse ee eene Chapter 4 Diagnostics 99 Level 0 DiagB6stigs ua i Level Di ae ostieSu nn ere ema n e eR Gs eina Printer ConfiguratiOn 2 2 n oett horaire titre ert RU ERO PUER iaa Configuring the Printer aieo Deere P Sasha usaq Communication Interface Modes sse Diagnostic Modes a o ote aidera ost otia d eia e aya Emulation Software Options Hardware ODHons eterne Re erit pe idees Default Code Paeeu aon iesere ut eue toe eee ER Level 2 Diagnostiska atin epi Qe d oo tee ee p ved eoe inita
88. NCR 7167 Two Station POS Printer Release 1 0 Owner s Manual CZ NCR B005 000 1406 Revision C November 2002 The product described in this book is a licensed product of NCR Corporation NCR is the registered trademark of NCR Corporation Other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective holders It is the policy of NCR Corporation NCR to improve products as new technology components software and firmware become available NCR therefore reserves the right to change specifications without prior notice All features functions and operations described herein may not be marketed by NCR in all parts of the world In some instances photographs are of equipment prototypes Therefore before using this document consult with your NCR representative or NCR office for information that is applicable and current To maintain the quality of our publications we need your comments on the accuracy clarity organization and value of this book Address correspondence to Retail Systems Group Atlanta NCR Corporation 2651 Satellite Blvd Duluth GA 30136 Copyright 2002 By NCR Corporation Dayton Ohio U S A All Rights Reserved Important Information to the User In order to ensure compliance with the Product Safety FCC and CE marking requirements you must use the power supply power cord and interface cable which were shipped with this product or which meet the following parameters Power
89. O K RS 5 8 W K 5 S Z DO K Balt pos lale bali EO PERRA AEREE ERA FO i rie dea Ea NN E240 E2FF 40 RRR SR eS 50 Det eee ne 60 firmo AK FAL UE ME ARES i a 70 UE aS eS ey A0 RRR ERO HE A R Ue RENE SE SRA RE SEM POO Past CO a rae Hb bea Hea ae a a a NOS PS PS DO SS Ea SR TA Hea es RS aR YES TR EO 3 CL BE BAK ay Be SS SS OO FO PRE GE stp ERE E RE ETE IE 5 E340 ESFF 40 mIRKUSIRISAWIN SAR TS S SS 401536 2 SO ee FEA SF EE DR Se TR 60 JR ARE HER AAR EH HRA 70 faa NERS AR de SCHO We REUS AO FERRI AE DERE ST AR UR ETE ii BRIERE Sean rayta ps FO pecan ANN SE Nl ee E440 E4FF 40 AB Be tht DSL aL AR AR AB Be ERA SZ 50 QSPWAYMKHAHS EEN BMT bee Be BS BRS Bis Ee 60 EE er sa si s a 70 SHORSHRAZ Es Ga ak kan ESA EATE AO PRBS 3 55 56 MANZE ON SSA SHOE SE SESE Se 5 DL BE OB Sih SIT ae D as Te A BP CO EKXEERLEGERIG RE LED Rk ae PR RO RE OT DO fEU EEANEUEA TS SUL Bee arar EO AT TAPING Sc Be CER UR ORDRE UR FO iar ot E540 ESFF 40 pattie sl teal SO Seca ae gk OUR ea Sh ce RS Se a as eA YR i TR AR E a a E SR RE SL o e AO peed ED Lat eh M HEN BO RAEE T NIRE HE ERK CO RUE RU RAN RARUS AE DO NERONE URS A A EO HCTMS tN HS HE HA S FO LOT ra RE oe Ree RBH UR E640 E6FF 40 if NOE CERE IE RNC TER 90 PRA A Epid letale WIRAWIKUIRANS ISR YW EER HB ARR 70 EEE ERER M AQ dee au ten ag poe obs FS SSRIS IL RICA OS EE Dir Ti ae ESS We a RS 35 bed EO vite ger E FO pa Rew tic Phy He SLR W
90. O Ree Si upa A Fe Me DS Lu EO ils is Pe a eet A a a OS FO WONG N EN E I EGER RR C640 COFF 40 aOR RGR De ae BS A EER R K S0 eA i Ws RM GA ERU RN UN 60 Xu f E UR ESL SERRE RUE 70 SENE BS SSR BN November 2002 271 7167 Owner s Manual Code Pare 980 Traditional Chinese Cont C840 C8FF C940 COFF XEU presi SAH PaO NE EEEN SERIES vg MET SAE PALATE ADDR FY YALA RT A e LR Ue BIDS oua SAEI HERE ATTAN At RUF RETT RITER ER R AIET EFTA EBERT EEEa ae CA40 CAFF ST ET RSL PE aL Fe PCR TBFSIBCBELBRARE AAS S EEIE VER RS fee CLP GU ER SCR I Kel aD Ee REP o Rd mEn Op zs M Pa ERU ERES 22 He be SR EL INA MO n3 Pure RS IE Wr Zt Sin ee ECCE ET Phin ARI FIFO RE HS rrr lS E IX SRR CR RIRIN PII FB TURIRIXFUS YT CB40 CBFF TREATS HEAT E PLNS EHE WRIA DIR REHEAT Hb SRF EET EIS SEL ET ay YE RIpHl IJ B Br BLUE aF ig SMA ZGPUST 5 MALI ARRE NERE RA CERA hE SER AE ro REE CC40 CCFF Pe bea Be TIE ARAH ER EW Hg RHR d Cub EDD EE WEL UBER Ies Et BU S BA BR ae ER TRIER tra ta EE TORT ento te Eua fick de SIRE EE Spire Dees iei TC o TAGE ARR x DC ERHH IRA BD TART eee FRESE RH SBI ERR RYE DICIS tB ob CD40 COFF JAUSIE PRSE Te EAE th 1h LTF TESS ASCII KU AS BR SEE IA SIS SEER YE RESET HEERES HTE EF IRIE RC PEE MET RTE ETERS ET AL LEZ E PRPS SHAT ARBRE WOES e LEE RERESET 2 Fee CUI EE E E DUERME EI EN ERE Z i oe E XS SE DR eS OE OR CE40 CEFF EY ap MARI tac ES
91. PI 8x576 80mm Density 80mm 8x424 58mm 0 424 101DPI 58mm 32 24DotSingle 24 203 DPI 0 288 101DPI 24x288 Density 80mm 80mm 0 212 101DPI 24x212 58mm 58mm 33 24 Dot 24 203 DPI 0 576 101DPI 24x576 Double 80mm 80mm Density 0 424 101DPI 24x424 58mm 58mm November 2002 143 7167 Owner s Manual 144 Chapter 6 Commands Slip Station Value Mode No of Dots No of Dots Horizontal Number of ofm Vertical Dots Line 0 7 Dot Single 7 72 DPI 224 69 5 DPI 7 x 224 Density 1 7 Dot Double 7 72 DPI 448 139 DPI 7 x 448 Density 32 33 Not Available on Slip In single density one byte 7 dots is printed in each full dot column in double density one byte is printed in each half full dot column Adjacent horizontal dots overlapping dots are not printed on the slip In 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode There are 8 vertical dots Value of n 8 Dot Value of n 24 Dot Single Density Mode Single Density Mode Value of d n1 256 x n2 3 x n1 256 x n2 Number of Bytes of Data Printed left to right 8 dot mode Printed down then across 24 dot mode Formulas 8 Dot Single Density n1 256 x n2 24 Dot Single Density 3x n1 256 x n2 8 Dot Single Density Mode Receipt and Slip Receipt Slip MSB Top of Bit Image SHE mn LSB Most Significant Bit ls Not Printed In A756 Emulation November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands 24 Dot Single
92. Pe ES a as Loir a SES 38 Sa bis 2538 mn eae iit B240 B2FF emsa awa S p si TAL an Mete EIS SS SL Sedan hem TOWERS SR ER HB Si iis BS A REN E ERREUR SEA RE OS ee yE RA iP MEAE RIR IER TE TERES W u SG AR RAEAN ESSERE BA RAR B340 BOFF Un Pa a x AA sue se A EEE WE ioe 0121 luted H A A Ped oe A i BR a im a W T FR ER ak UO S E OY ATK Pe RSs RG ew ae t Lid Wen IC HO PR nad SF B440 B4FF AE YEE DR IR SEE SE S W TK S EU x mma ma RETE E TB S RAUS P NCUR DR A EAA riores PERRA BRT SE RT Kenn nl bode Se rae RR ER F oe RATER ET see CER Ra AE a Se I ee T8815 ND ORO es DUREE TN 34 B540 BSFF REIP S ue sa EHE Eb N UE RE EH OA SK Ep EE EE SESE SERE SUB SUR a ta Scie Rene IMMER HM EE HERESREE ES EHR ROM R CEMA BBE nae HSH Y AUR RR Se 2E WIS WE Wy dk 3 JEE Ki BERN 356 NOR Be ORES HO ia Sa Gr EU HA aE BP A BS B640 B6FF PRD STR HRR RARE HERRED EKEN BIG 40 45 SSE BESS ARA AER FE DP ETE gn Fi E TRUE DTE TE BESSER AUREUS RE RAPA OR ORE US PETES EUR eB Sy ere a Speer rete SSIS A E HS R E a R AE B740 B7FF IRIS E Fa eA Fk Sd a E TERE SE FA si DEOR UR DD RECTE D BPE ise a Ta UR GG ES IUS HE RC WL OE IS ER aE UR EE UG i SE fm a SU ATE UR HER A NEEREENACTE SRNA Chea EARANN Peru woe each ae og eE EEEE ten EMAER b ERE November 2002 Appendix C 269 7167 Owner s Manual Code Pare 950 Tradition
93. QUSISIRIOBHIISDIRIAIEISIOEE ete pet SD s AAI Sea bub g pE pe pae ARRAZAT 29824 SESIARSESURERRSR Code page 932 97 Code page 832 98 xj hdc prd Melee 206 a OR UL ELA LES ee LERA UBI Semi VR Das pisi eT je Db i heel PSE m i se HEI Code page 932 9B OE lle tested ie F bee R ELSE HR he Se LS S mais M EE SETA SBS November 2002 Appendix C 234 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 932 Cont Code page 932 9C REGES EE Fa ie a E E E E L_a deis SUS EET ait ee ae dr EERE CEE SE aR E Coa Nb SE coin SP Biubigpng eel oe A oo Nem WI Ei eae weg EE Ld M give CR RC xl mca hum Code page 932 9E eee TUR SE AAA AAT ACAL ALA AE ZS Hip iinet RES SAAT Ped Al Pe SE HEA ERS E dudes Lede ch E braid HPI G En Ste PW Se chh II SOT SACRE SE P S PS CE d Bo ee EAST H uds cH HEX ES SSS pasas Yam ip Rin ery bet RUWDIMUPA SSE aS MOGBHESLIBIB IS PA AR Code page 932 9D FRRRNITURE HARI IMEHR FFIR EE EET Ete MIR MURS naan inis die pint iioi imo RIRA SINIR Reis IH FEET EH ICI ICH HANTE hE MEIT IM Se eT SRG YS HESR TE AA SEM S ACACIA BAYS SRT AS TNT TICCI LIYE Eeen eee P S 2 BE R IUE EET S EE 52 Lb MW P SS Pe ER DE EIL x Soy 3112 ZS TT Sak tee eon SB style ois fce LAC S TRS gt a SA pM SRB STA Ys ANZ 2 fa rye tented tll AAAI UAE AUREUS wwe oe RAL EA RS AR TA Code page 932 E aE ak n Su ed ane y wa St BES r BL Be a BE Bi
94. R POS Terminal DC Power from NCR POS Terminal USB Communication Cables USB Type A to Type B Connector USB Type A to Type B Connector USB Plus Power Cables USB Plus Power to Type B Connector USB Plus Power to Type B Connector Extended Slip Table Standard Cash Drawer Cash Drawer Cable Ordering Documentation Contact your sales representative to obtain the following documentation 7167 Thermal Receipt and Impact Slip Printer Parts Identification Manual B005 0000 1408 7167 Thermal Receipt and Impact Slip Printer Service Manual B0005 0000 1407 includes Troubleshooting Guide and the Preventative Maintenance Guide Chapter 1 About the 7167 Printer Type 75 Watt Power Supply 75 Watt Power Supply United States International no plug United Kingdom S E V Australia International with plug 0 7 meters 3 0 meters 9 8 feet 1 0 Meters 4 0 Meters 2 0 Meters 4 0 Meters 3 0 Meters 4 0 Meters 2189 Y Cable November 2002 Number 7167 K331 V001 7167 K302 V001 1406 C325 0030 1416 C319 0030 1416 C321 0030 1416 C320 0030 1416 C322 0030 1416 C323 0030 1416 C359 0007 1416 C266 0040 1416 C712 0010 1416 C712 0040 1416 C528 0010 1416 C528 0040 1416 C713 0010 1416 C713 0040 7167 K280 V001 2189 K002 V001 Switchable for Drawer 1 or Drawer 2 1416 C372 0006 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 1 About the 7167 Printer Cleaning the Printer Cleaning the Cabinet The external cabinet mat
95. R signal to transmit data Was an XON or XOFF charactor last received Wait for XON character Send Data XON character Hex 11 XOFF character Hex 13 DTR DSR Protocol The DTR signal is used to control data transmission to the printer It is driven low when the printer is ready to recieve data and driven high when it cannot accept any more data Data is transmitted from the printer after it confirms that the DSR signal is low Is DTR High or Low Wait for DTR to Go Low Send Data RS 232C Technical Specifications This section describes the pin settings for the connectors and the RS 232C interface parameters The RS 232C parameters are selectable in the Diagnostic mode See Diagnostics Communications Interface Settings in chapter 4 for the position of the DIP switches The RS 232C parameters must match those of the host November 2002 74 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Communication Connectors RS 232C Communication Connector Pin Assignments The illustration shows the RS 232C communication connector and pin assignments The connector is a 9 pin male D shell connector and is located in the hollow cavity under the printer at the rear Function Pin Numbers Function Logic Ground 5 9 Not Used DTR 4 8 CTS TXD 3 7 RTS RXD 2 6 DSR Not Used 1 Shell Frame Ground Printer View Male RS 232C 9 Pin to 9 Pin Cable Diagram Note This information is provided for testing
96. RH 255 November 2002 Appendix C BF40 BFFF C140 ClFF 7167 Owners Manual Code Page 949 Korean Cont BE40 BEFF CO40 COFF RIKKMUKIOKIF K KOMIK KI KX sal EH KU RAKI KHRRIKI OF OK oM iain aoro KU CRR C340 C3FF C240 C2FF eee at Te Mirando ac ICI DI prx rri QUU Cp A 256 November 2002 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 949 Korean Cont C540 COFF C440 CAFF Mo uel w AD ul m wl art C740 C7FF C640 CoFF C940 COFF C840 C8FF 257 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 949 Korean Cont CA40 CAFF AO NE ER BLD TUI E ICH HER Rs HOST BO RREME AT DiGIR A HO AR NZ CO Se PARTE HS Ps AA Un TST te Te DO AARETE MENEE AB AT eR E0 Al rE a Be AR RT Kasa FO PRESRSHEHE AS SRS AH HP b E CC40 CCFF 40 50 60 70 90 AO MISMO d SOREN BL mi PS YT LLL ESE C CO RIM FEN Se ak RN GLE RD ID a CL eee D MEN ROL KHER BES FO SEM MER EEA SEEEN CE40 CEFF 40 50 60 70 A0 SURDINBORIMYHDRS ae BO WIR ERR A SII CO FEEN E TL mae DON DO ETERNIA NAA E AERE SE Pia teen poe DI FO MADE NEDEMUR 5A 7LOLR ALAS Appendix C CB40 CBFF November 2002 258 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix C Code Page 949 Korean Cont D040 DOFF D140 DIFF 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 S 90 A0 SU ENHEHUEGNEA SEHE 2 roses coiMMd P Ras ii ituna CO BRIM TOMA TR is SORIA CO EEA E iS DO HOGNSGMIOGETAONSEOG Do gom su CE EUR EO RRR RAR E
97. RS WERE EO onset EENAA SORRISE A FO Sr aR SP ae BGG C HX FO ARSE J roy ia AE REMIT D240 D2FF D340 D3FF 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 90 90 A0 SAMMI MARGE RIR ARTUR A0 Ae Ae BO FM PREMR SITS MES BO GSOORNHAIEUONISVEUCA AUR C CO REEE EE ET Tkt CO SAMAR HE DA ME M N aA e A Ws et kd Es DO AAA Eee EAA i EO ARR MMS ABRAMINTAD E0 MMSRUETEGHISNT ES FO MADRS MHERM CERES FO ZEU RAUS ERE D440 DAFF D540 D5FF 40 50 x 60 60 70 70 90 AO BOWDECOUN DE Beam we MAAK TTET 0 ANRETT E TR 80 E EE Lo MURGUEERUECUNUSUNETETT CO ENH AASA IA TATS AE ERR DO ADF CRAM EES Do SIR UIA ee a IS EO SATE SIR SSN PSS Mp MED ae PA FO UMRIE AMAB E a ROREM HSE FO MMR November 2002 259 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 949 Korean Cont D640 D6FF WERNA E Lil E tdi tlt a Ll RR ARSED WERE S ti AR SADR AR AD On s LE me LE x Appendix C D740 D7FF 40 50 60 70 s AO WW DRE URRERGIS BO pa Ds Lapis Eh Er ga CO BERA ERRERA DO Ld p ediderat EO S32 NGC AENEA NE EMILE FO 3 PAM ZAA BG tA Ak H ERI au D940 D9FF 40 50 60 70 z A0 BRETAR RUINS 3088682 BO ird bacca Pon CO HERIETH RA DARET ER DO MUSS REODNCU NH on ee EQ HAUARD E SEE FO iEXERENIABEEAM UM DB4O DBFF 40 50 60 70 80 90 AO SERPS Rah RN 5 REDE BO 75595 R5T5 15S RS KS EDS 3525 38355 CO 3 0p5 MS GFACOR GERESIEMCREUH T W EA DO SERVE MACIHIA I NIE BN EO NUR NEUEN MEER CE EROR LOA A FO LARRET k
98. S SEE P ee E740 E7FF A0 apd aah HUE RON a orm apa og epee EEA A S tt CO a iran TEENE UE ERR D MMR SUES ae Rica aie UE se geet IU nut November 2002 Appendix C 275 7167 Owner s Manual Code Pare 950 Traditional Chinese Cont E840 ESFF 40 Bes ESR BAe BARE Bak Mic iy ew EE 50 dd GO AREER 5 SH ok pk Gt SSS AE HSH Sit 70 ERI RI RUE A RU RM AO Sey SS 2 Bi Fa E TR SE BO AREER Sh Re SAR RRR RRC Ze CO RERREC WO Bas ET SH S580 9s BG SG DO Leta usu HOLA EE ORO RO EO acm eee eee ta FO MERCIAN E EP PO Oe RE E940 E9FF 40 RR ORCA ye gk FY PE A R E A SO EUER UE RE ye ERR i a RIE LEU iy Me EM i 5 PR UR Op 70 FREER A Fa SR NERO DR BUR REIR o e M A0 EAEE A ATATEN BO Siy OE RUE a i Hig CO II a nita DO Prap ARB lt SS SERUUM EO EUN ONIS RO REAR OE ERR R FO pjes qaa Loa be EA40 EAFF DARE EA ep dea i LE A EE DEBES SERO OO TH PRE CHEATS NURHPINAEACHERB RENE CHER d EREA RUE SER REA AMMEN BE SE e FARRA EM Mi EB40 EBFF 40 WX SE TS A Me Sk PATRES HOC 90 EEG SH FE HO UR DUE E d GO ibt ed PUR LIN EDU E REL 70 WE Se BE LSE Ha Te Ree AO ARGS aw aa aane eE RAAE i BO 55 553 ST WERE R a BS CO Tos r biasa DO jJ w isuu shi ES BE NEES 58 EO skeen sean eet PIIRE FO SARARIR DAE eK EAA Be EC40 ECFF EE UL E ESE E 9 dab acd fole 50 PESEN TAE ME ft IEEE ARR EE 60 BERBERS SR CRE Be ATS EE 70 RERNE A h AO RE ROR eos s s Pie Seas n DO PEINER EE ERETRIA EO RRR TS ak Rie i
99. SComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H02 amp Chr n Exceptions Available only in Download Mode November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Get Firmware CRC ASCII GS ACK Hexadecimal 1D 06 Decimal 296 Causes the printer to calculate the CRC for the currently selected sector and transmits the result This is performed normally after downloading a sector to verify that the downloaded firmware is correct The printer also calculates the CRC for each sector during power up and halts the program if any sector is erroneous The printer transmits ACK if the calculated CRC is correct for the selected sector NAK if the CRC is incorrect or if no sector is selected Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H06 Return Microprocessor CRC ASCII GS BEL Hexadecimal 1D 07 Decimal 297 Returns the CRC calculated over the boot sector code space Formulas ACK lt low byte gt lt high byte gt Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H07 Erase the Flash Memory ASCII GSSO Hexadecimal 1D 0E Decimal 2914 Causes the entire Flash Memory except the boot to be erased The printer returns ACK if the command is successful NAK if it is unsuccessful Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp HOE Exceptions November 2002 215 7167 Owner s Manual 216 Chapter 6 Commands Available only in Download Mode Return Main Program Fla
100. Supply UL Listed QQGQ Class 2 power supply with SELV Secondary Extra Low Voltage non energy hazard output limited energy source input rated 100 240 Vac 1 5 0 8 A 50 60 Hz output rated 24 Vdc 2 3 A or 3 15A Use of this product with a power supply other than the NCR power supply will require you to test this power supply and NCR printer for FCC and CE mark certification Interface Cable A shielded 360 degree interface cable must be used with this product The shield must be connected to the frame or earth ground connection or earth ground reference at EACH end of the cable Use of a cable other than described here will require that you test this cable with the NCR printer and your system for FCC and CE mark certification Power Cord A UL listed detachable power cord must be used for this product For applications where the power supply module may be mounted on the floor a power cord with Type SJT marking must be used For applications outside the US power cords which meet the particular country s certification and application requirements should be used Use of a power cord other than described here may result in a violation of safety certifications which are in force in the country of use Federal Communications Commission FCC Radio Frequency Interference Statement Warning Changes or modifications to this unit not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate
101. T WRITE STAMP OR SIGN BELOW THIS LINE RESERVED FOR FINANCIAL INSTITUTION USE Check Orientation Push Paper Feed Button The check then goes through the flip routine only no printing takes place To exit the Check Flip Test Model 1 2 3 Enter the Configuration Menu again Disable the Check Flip Test Mode Exit the Configuration Menu The printer is in Normal Mode and can communicate with the host computer Print Head Gap Adjustment Mode Print Head Gap Adjustment Test Mode prints several lines of H character This is the slip print testing during the print head gap adjustment During adjustment some covers will be removed from the printer even in this condition slip printing need to be run when paper is inserted Print Head Gap Adjustment Test Mode is enabled and disabled using the Configuration Menu To run the Print Head Gap Adjustment Test Mode Ll 2 Enable the Print Head Gap Test Mode through the Configuration Menu See Configuring the Printer for instructions on how to enter the Configuration Menu Insert a slip into the slip station November 2002 63 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics 3 Push Paper Feed Button 4 Several lines of Rolling ASCII character will be printed Note Printing will take place even when receipt cover is open 5 Go to step 2 again to repeat this test To exit the Print Head Gap Adjustment Test Mode 1 Enter the Configuration Menu agai
102. a is full or before a new character set is defined Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H23 amp Chr n Exceptions This command is only valid for the receipt station However it will be processed correctly regardless of whether the receipt station is currently selected Define Downloaded Bit Image ASCII GS n1 n2d1 dn Hexadecimal 1D 2A n1 n2 d1 dn Decimal 29 42 n1 n2 d1 dn Value of n1 See the following table Value of n2 See the following table Value of d See the following table Value of n1 Value of n2 Value of d 1 72 8 x r1 Number of 1 64 Number of Vertical Bytes of Data Horizontal Dot Columns Bytes Printed Down Then Across he number of bytes sent is represented by the following formula n 8 x n1 x n2 n1 x n2 must be less than or equal to 4608 Enters a downloaded bit image such as a logo into RAM or Flash with the number of dots specified by n1 and n2 in 7156 Emulation unless loaded into Flash The downloaded bit image is available until power is turned off another bit image is defined or either Initialize Printer 1B 40 or Define User Defined Character Set 1B 26 command is received By default 7156 Emulation loads downloaded bit image to SRAM while 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode loads them to Flash See the illustration on the following page for a graphic representation of the downloaded bit image November 2002 147 7167 Owner s M
103. ak bet TE didi FR ie Se Se AR TE E M A E CEU Sangh Z tP IESKERIEEG ERE ER IA M ae REIS EUIS TB EE CEL SI PH SE ABE BS Ge SAGE HE OB SR SHS ORF November 2002 Appendix C 270 7167 Owner s Manual Code Pare 949 Traditional Chinese Cont C040 COFF SESR IG SE SESERUDE ERR WERE TE TR M PR TERCER eS SRORTRER AERE ESAE Mae aE re eran rer SE HS OEC MER WEE SE a RR IE RE ENERERORCEESEE ER ROMA CHORO EN AU SEHR RRSUARROATREREES WR WE Pra eq AR ipi EROR AUR UL re ts C140 CIFF FG A ETATE i RR Sint hh iq aa TE AER SI AS S IRR RC 365518 AANA TEES MESE CETE TEE ELAT Lore Se ay s s R B Reh tes eer suu SAN SE a Pa Se a FS a BS BL ER C240 C2FF He RA RE I TE SR RAT Te BS REUS SY HE aa tr eA AL eth toa tae te Si AIRLASAERKSEHGRA SA ees EIER EUR E MEE ERRAT DR SUSE Cae MAM erste or SE RUE UM ory Gee SI SR MM OM ME PE WO EE DE E C340 C3FF a A ERE PLE ERO PUE IEEE WO EEOR SA RS EUG VENERE RUE a SS PURO Re ee BUSES UE SE aE HR SK W Rie A he ESE eH Hee Se EAE E AE p A Ed aE Appendix C C440 C4FF 40 A MS dE i Ek En AB AE EGR T RR UR REUTERS EC RS Sa eB GO HR SBR i SL MOL AUR COUR 70 ARABS ST Sak vee EAP AR AO KEW RR ee sae RES BO led A eat hole ho METUS EO uW n ay ET EX FO aA AO MA Dt WE ea 1 HE M E C540 C5FF E a FG 2 DO ah p W yg So 90 ASRS Ba far GE KOC A EB 60 RONG MM NS ee MS eS 70 SUR RD ESE Pag aK TE Be HR AO RR BO NUNG EISE EE HE CO Seria peri D
104. al Chinese Cont B840 B8FF FE SU SSS GE ee OB ERR RO RR FE AAA RR M de SPE HA Pe PUES MR MNES AE WSR AR RS SE HERE DE IE BE AT i s s fot WE d PS SUR DS uh Si t OT BE Fl fi Se ak B Se HS SB tt a hb Fe BE 855 PRR eS RABID HS BS Fe DL PRE RE PERRO BY aL EE 25 pi Li B940 B9FF FAR OR IB E E S R IDIRIRIB BIS K JBS A BH RR AS Reo SE GK SSP ho post SEER SA BU SE r SEH 9T Tae Oe 36 MEE BREST SER RA RETRO kau ORE T i P CR RE BI i e W OR OE DR se CT AU LA EU rap nu ou tardi nu TUE NUM BA40 BAFF RR NUNC RU CACHE te Vu OR E DOE UFU E Pk REIHE IU sasaqa CEE ERR RRR BR AR ORIG RR A pese ai t RU ache eae RENE REX Eka E CELO re KE od Rer km itio RE MERIT BB40 BBFF EE E 1 We UN MeN Br ONG UN CR Ie BC40 BCFF pi pde a a RES RT opa LAO HEE OR K YI SE MK Fa NB Sc D LS m FEXROALSQRHERAR BU ric Wr MERRIE ey PR RTA RBS i RR BD40 BDFF TEERAA A a PS A E BR CE CRT GE US ie US TE RARE WE E A A A MARKER a RE A AEE AR A KERRE E BEE CS jap q ae He BER ER em ORT ae CELO LIA TID Sa RSI GETS EUR RO Ea NO baie te Sara Tg Eu BE40 BEFF BEE GES SFB Pe as join SR GSS SB 858 058 5 38 9 BS EFF F Ee E UE Be eR CEE SE ROS We DA He ES RAT S TOR VERER ARE Si Gi yk ee s p p 9 RR ORE A DAUERTE Et ES ICE ee akupana E RS E EY Fa A ae Rh AAG LEM ea EE ART Aa TAPES PE RC UR BF40 BFFF eR S ikut HR IU HEAR TERE IR PASTA NIN OEIL CARRERE eee RECS SOLE PER RG BABE F
105. alid on the receipt station This is only available in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode Select or Cancel Smoothing Mode ASCII GSb n Hexadecimal 1D62n Decimal 2998n This command is ignored Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H62 amp Chr n Select Superscript or Subscript Modes ASCII USENQn Hexadecimal 1F 05 n Decimal 3105n Value of n 0 Normal character size 1 Select subscript size 2 Select superscript size Default 0 normal size November 2002 139 7167 Owner s Manual 140 Chapter 6 Commands Turns superscript or subscript modes on or off This attribute may be combined with other characters size settings commands 12 13 1B 21 n 1D 21 n This command is only available on the receipt station in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1F amp Chr amp H05 amp Chr n Exceptions This command is ignored if n is out of the specified range This is only available in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Summary of Rotated Printing The table shows the combinations of Set Cancel Upside Down Print Set Cancel Rotated Print clockwise and Rotated Print counterclockwise Rotated CCW is mutually exclusive with the other two commands Unintended consequences may result when rotated CCW is mixed with other commands The samples of the print show only th
106. alidate Code Page Katakana 1 Click Code Page 932 2 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate FOR 7156 Mode Code Page 437 gt 1 Click Code Page 850 gt 2 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection For Asian code pages code page 936 949 or 950 replaces code page 932 in the above shown menu Only one Asian code page Either 932 936 949 or 950 will exist in firmware November 2002 71 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics Save Parameters This function allows to save the selected default code page selecton or return to the default code page selecton to select additional options Press the Paper Feed Button for the option you want Save new parameters YES gt Long Click NO MODIFY gt Short Click EEPROM to Default Settings This selection resets the configuration to the Default Settings Caution Be extremely careful changing any of the printer settings to avoid inadvertently changing other settings that might affect the performance of the printer RESET EEPROM TO DEFAULT VALUES YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Save Parameters This function allows to save the selected default code page selecton or return to the default code page selecton to sele
107. alue of n 0 Off 1 On When 0 and 1 are the Least Significant Bit LSB Default 0 Off Turns Italic print mode on or off This command is only available in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode Italic print mode is available for built in user defined characters This command only works on the receipt station Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H49 amp Chr n Exceptions Only the lowest bit of n is valid This command is only valid for the receipt station in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode November 2002 133 7167 Owner s Manual 134 Chapter 6 Commands Select International Character Set ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Value of n ESC Rn or ESC tn 1B52n or 1B74n 2782n Or 27116n 7158 Native Mode and 7156 Emulation 7167 Native Mode 0 Code Page 437 US English 0 Code Page 437 1 Code Page 850 Multilingual 1 Code Page 850 2 Code Page 852 Slavic 3 Code Page 860 Portuguese 4 Code Page 863 French Canadian 5 Code Page 865 Nordic 6 Code Page 858 Multilingual with Euro Symbol 7 Code Page 866 Cyrillic 8 Code Page 1252 Windows Latin I 9 Code Page 862 Hebrew 20 Code Page Katakana 21 Code Page 874 Thailand 22 Code Page 864 Arabic 128 Code Page 932 Kanji 129 Code Page 936 Simple Chinese 130 Code Page Korean 131 Code Page Traditional Chinese November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Selects the character se
108. and Set Print Area in Page Mode 1B 57 and sets the position for buffering character data Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp HOC Exceptions This command enabled only in Page Mode 182 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select Page Mode ASCII ESC L Hexadecimal 1B4C Decimal 2776 Switches from Standard Mode to Page Mode After printing has been completed either by the Print and Return to Standard Mode FF command or Select Standard Mode 1B 53 the printer returns to Standard Mode The developed data is deleted after being printed This command sets the position where data is buffered to the position specified by Select Print Direction in Page Mode 1B 54 within the printing area defined by Set Print Area in Page Mode 1B 57 This command switches the settings for the following commands which values can be set independently in Standard Mode and Page Mode to those for Page Mode 1 Set Right Side Character Spacing 1B 20 Select 1 6 Inch Line Spacing 1B 32 Set Line Spacing 1B 33 he IN It is possible only to set values for the following commands in Page Mode These commands are not executed Select or Cancel 90 Degree Clockwise Rotation 1B 56 Select Justification 1B 61 Select or Cancel Upside Down Printing 1B 7B Set Left Margin 1D 4C Set Print Area Width 1D 57 9o Oo Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H4C Exceptio
109. and troubleshooting only RS 232C 9 Pin to 9 Pin Cable 7167 Je Printer 9 Pin Male 9 Pin Male Connector Connector RS 232C 9 Pin to 9 Pin Cable 9 Pin Female9 Pin Female Hon DCD1 r 1DCD RxD2 lt gt 2RxD TxD3 lt A gt 3TxD DTR4 lt gt 4DTR LGND5 lt gt 5LGND DSR6 6DSR RTS7 lt gt TRTS CTS8 lt X gt 8CTS SHLD lt gt SHLD November 2002 75 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Communication USB Cable Connector The following illustration is for the USB Type B communication connector and pin assignment Printer View End Pin No Signal 1 5 V USB 2 Data 3 Data 4 Ground Power Cable Connector The illustration shows the power cable connector and pin assignments The power cable connector is a 3 pin DIN plug and is located in the hollow cavity under the printer at the rear 24V FG Printer View End Female November 2002 76 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Communication Cash Drawer Connector and Pin Assignments The following illustration shows the pin out designation for the cash drawer connectors The following table provides the pinout assignments for cash drawers one and two The cash drawer connectors are located at the rear of the printer Pin 1 Pin 6 Pin Number Cash Drawer 1 Connector 1 Frame Ground Drawer 1 Solenoid Drawer 1 Status Switch 24 Volts to Solenoid
110. anual Chapter 6 Commands Top of Graphic Column 72 x 8 Max Column One Exceptions See the illustration for the Print Downloaded Bit Image command 1D 2F for a representation of the bit image Related Information See 1D 22 n Select Memory Type to store logos and 1D 23 n Select the Current Logo For the 7158 native mode and 7167 Native Mode of operation if multiple logos are to be defined and used this command should be preceded by the Sleect Current Logo command to define the number by which this dowloaded logo is to be referenced 148 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Print Downloaded Bit Image ASCII GS m Hexadecimal 1D 2F m Decimal 2947 m Chapter 6 Commands Value and Range of m Value of m Print Mode Vertical DPI Horizontal DPI 0 Normal 203 203 1 Double Wide 203 101 2 Double High 101 203 3 Quadruple 101 101 IDot density measured in dots per inch Prints a downloaded bit image in RAM or Flash on the receipt station at a density specified by m It is ignored if any data is in the print buffer if the downloaded bit image is undefined or if the data defined exceeds one line See the illustration for a representation of the bit image Top of Graphic Column Column One 72 x 8 Max MSB Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H2F amp Chr m Related Information See 1D 22 n Select Memory Type to store logos and 1D 23 n Sele
111. cations handshaking control is selected the printer transmits the one byte response regardless of the host signal DSR When Auto Status Back ASB is enabled using the Enable Disable Automatic Status Back command 1D 61 the status transmitted by this command Transmit Status and the ASB status must be differentiated according to the information found in Recognizing Data from the Printer This is found in the Real Time Commands section of this document November 2002 159 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands The status bytes to be transmitted are described in the following four tables Printer Status n 1 or n 49 Bit OfffOn Hex Decimal Status for Transmit Status 0 Off 00 0 Receipt paper adequate On 01 1 Receipt paper low 1 Off 00 0 Receipt paper adequate On 02 2 Receipt paper low 2 Off 00 0 Receipt paper present On 04 4 Receipt paper exhausted 3 Off 00 0 Receipt paper present On 08 8 Receipt paper exhausted Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to off 5 Off 00 0 Slip leading edge sensor paper present On 20 32 Slip leading edge sensor no paper 6 Off 00 0 Slip trailing edge sensor paper present On 40 64 Slip trailing edge sensor no paper 7 Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to off Cash Drawer Status n 2 or n 50 Bit OfffOn Hex Decimal Status for Transmit Status 0 Of 00 0 One or both cash drawers open On 01 1 Both cash drawers closed 1 Off 00 0 One or both cash drawers open On 02 2 Both cash drawers closed 2 Un
112. ce call or voiding of the printer warranty Consult your NCR technical support specialist if you have any questions Press the Paper Feed Button for the print density you want SET PRINT DENSITY YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click 100 gt 1 Click 110 gt 2 Clicks 120 gt 3 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Maximum Power Option This function allows the user to set the maximum power for the printer to 75W or 55W Press the Paper Feed Button for the option you want November 2002 67 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics SET MAX POWER OPTION YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click 55W Power Supply gt Long Click 75W Power Supply gt Short Click Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Paper Low Sensor Paper Low Sensor makes it possible to enable or disable the paper low sensor for particular printer configurations Press the Paper Feed Button for the option you want SET PAPER LOW SENSOR OPTION YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Enable Paper Low Sensor gt Long Click Disable Paper Low Sensor gt Short Clicks Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Paper Width This function allows the user to set the default paper width for the receipt
113. ching for driver files for your hardware device SY The wizard found a driver for the following device oy NCR 7167 Printer Windows found a driver for this device To install the driver Windows found click Next e ionetworks win2000 ionncr inf lt Back Cancel Note Location of the IONetworks files on the CD ROM may very depending on the version of the CD that is being used 30 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard MZ NCR 716 Receipt Slip Printer Windows has finished installing the software for this device To close this wizard click Finish lt Back Cancel Found New Hardware Wizard E Install Hardware Device Drivers Fata device driver is a software program that enables a hardware device to work with ey an operating system This wizard will complete the installation for this device e Edgeport Serial Port 1 Port 12 device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work Windows needs driver files for your new device To locate driver files and complete the installation click Next What do you want the wizard to do Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended C Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that can choose a specific driver lt Back Cancel November 2002 31 7167 Owner s Manual Cha
114. cimal 2784n Value of n Start position 0 Upper left corner proceeding across page to the right A 1 Lower left corner proceeding up the page B 2 Lower right corner proceeding across page to the left upside down C 3 Upper right corner proceeding down page D A B Cand D note the direction of of print See illustration Selects the printing direction and start position in Page Mode See the illustration The command can be sent multiple times so that several different print areas aligned in different print directions can be developed in the printer s page buffer before being printed by the Eject Slip command 0C A gt gt gt gt gt gt iw Y Y Y Y i Y m lt 4 4 lt lt lt Default 0 Upper left corner proceeding across page to the right Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H54 amp Chr n Exceptions This command is valid only in Page Mode This command is ignored if the value of n is out of the specified range November 2002 185 7167 Owner s Manual 186 Chapter 6 Commands Set Printing Area in Page Mode ASCII ESC W nl n2 n8 Hexadecimal 1B 57 n1 n2 n8 Decimal 27 87 11 n2 n8 Range 0 255 Default n1 4 2 0 n5 64 no 2 n7 64 n amp 2 Sets the position and size of the printing area in Page Mode The command can be sent multiple times so that several different print areas aligned in diffe
115. cohol If spotty or light printing problems persist after the thermal print head has been cleaned see Chapter 3 Solving Problems for more information Note The thermal print head does not normally require cleaning if the recommended paper is used If non recommended paper has been used for an extended period of time cleaning the print head with cotton swabs and rubbing alcohol will not be of much benefit See Ordering Receipt Paper on the next page for the recommended paper The print head is designed for a very long life but it may be replaced if needed Only a trained service representative may replace the print head See Chapter 3 Solving Problems to determine if the print head needs to be replaced Impact Print Head The bi directional impact print head is designed for a very long life but it may be replaced if needed Only a trained service technician may replace the impact print head See Chapter 3 Solving Problems to determine if the print head needs to be replaced 4 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 1 About the 7167 Printer Ordering Paper and Supplies Thermal receipt paper ribbon cassettes and forms can be ordered Documentation is also available Ordering Thermal Receipt Paper The 7167 requires NCR qualified thermal paper to be used on the thermal receipt print station to insure proper operation of the printer In addition the paper rolls must be have the following dimension Diam
116. computer Six character zero suppressed UPC E tags are generated from full 11 or 12 characters sent from the host computer according to standard UPC E rules Start Stop characters are added for Code 39 if they are not included November 2002 177 7167 Owner s Manual 178 Bar Code UPC A UPC E JAN13 EAN13 JAN8 EANS Code 39 B ojm i 25ijo s 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF 6 CODABAR NW 7 10 PDF 417 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode D 48 57 ASCII numerals 48 57 48 57 48 57 48 57 65 90 ASCII alphabet 32 36 37 43 45 46 47 ASCII special characters d1 dk 42 start stop code is supplied by printer if necessary 48 57 65 68 start code 48 57 36 43 45 46 47 58 1 255 Chapter 6 Commands n Length Fixed Length 11 12 Fixed Length 11 12 Fixed Length 12 13 Fixed Length 7 8 Variable Length Variable Length Even Number Variable Length Variable Length 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode Second Variation Length of Byte Specified at Beginning of String m 65 78 75 see the table d 0 127 see the table n 1 255 see the table The value of m selects the bar code system as described in the table When data is present in the print buffer the printer processes the data following m as normal data The variable d indicates the character code to be encoded into the specified bar code system See the table If character code d cann
117. content amp vbLf 5 This last step is to use the print downloaded image command to print Exceptions BMP file images that are not monochrome are ignored This command is only valid for the receipt station This is only available in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode Related Information See 1D 22 n Select Memory Type to save logos For the 7158 native mode and 7167 Native Mode of operation if multiple logos are to be defined and used this command should be preceded by the Select Current Logo command to define the number by which this downloaded logo is to be referenced November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select Bit Image Mode ASCII ESC mn1 n2 dl dn Hexadecimal 1B2Amn1n2d1 dn Decimal 27 42 m n1 n2 d1 dn Sets the print resolution and enters one line of graphics data into the print buffer Excess data is accepted but ignored Any print command is required to print the data after which the printer returns to normal processing mode See the illustration graphic representation of the bit image In 7156 Emulation Mode slip graphics are only 7 bit MSB not printed In 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode slip graphics are 8 bit Values Receipt Station Value Mode No of Dots No of Dots Horizontal Number of ofm Vertical Dots Line 0 SDotSingle 8 68 DPI 0 288 101DPI 8x288 80mm Density 80mm 8x212 58mm 0 212 101DPI 58mm 1 8 Dot Double 8 68 DPI 0 576 101D
118. ct additional options Press the Paper Feed Button for the option you want Save new parameters YES gt Long Click NO MODIFY gt Short Click November 2002 72 7167 Owner s Manual Level 2 Diagnostics Chapter 4 Diagnostics Level 2 diagnostics run during normal printer operation When the following conditions occur the printer automatically turns off the appropriate motor disables printing to prevent damage and turns on the green LED flashes the green LED if the receipt print head is too hot or the voltages are out of range Paper out Cover open Knife unable to go back to home position Print head too hot Power supply voltage out of range Slip or flip motor jam See Chapter 3 Solving Problems for more information about other conditions that may occur and how to correct them Status Power Off Firmware Download Level 0 Diagnostics Receipt Paper Low Temperature Error Voltage Error Cover Open Receipt Paper Out Knife Jam Slip Cover Open Flip Cover Open Receipt Cover Open Slip Motor Jam Flip Motor Jam Slip Ribbon Carriage Error All other states LED Behaviour Off Very Fast Blink No Blink Slow Blink No Blink No Blink Fast Blink Fast Blink Fast Blink then Slow Blink Fast Blink Fast Blink Fast Blink Fast Blink Fast Blink Fast Blink On November 2002 73 7167 Owner s Manual Level 3 Diagnostics Level 3 diagnostics keeps track of the following tallies an
119. ct the Current Logo November 2002 149 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Convert 6 Dots mm Bitmap to 8 Dots mm Bitmap ASCII US EOT n Hexadecimal 1F 04n Decimal 3104n Value 0 Off 1 On Default 0 Off Selects or cancels 6 dot mm in 7158 Emulation Mode and 7167 Native Mode When the 6 dot mm emulation is selected logos and graphics are expanded horizontally and vertically to emulate their size on a 6 dot mm printer The horizontal positioning commands also emulate positioning on a 6 dot mm printer Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1F amp Chr amp H04 amp Chr n Exception This command is available in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode only 150 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Status Commands Status Command Introduction The 7167 has three methods of providing status to the application These methods are through Batch Status Commands Real Time Status Commands and Auto Status Back An application may use one or more of these methods to understand the current status of the printer A brief description of each of these methods follows Batch Status Commands These commands are sent to the printer and stored in the printer s buffer Once the printer has processed all the previous commands these commands are processed and the proper status is returned to the application In the event a condition causes the printer to go BUSY it stops processing commands from the printe
120. cumentation to see if USB must be enabled in the BIOS setup Windows NT To see if your POS terminal is USB compliant look at the back e If it has a USB connector port your hardware is all set Note Even though the host may have a USB port Windows NT does not natively support plug and play USB because it does not have a built in driver You will need to load the NCR Windows NT USB driver see Installing the USB Printer Drivers Windows 2000 1 Open the Control Panel 2 Click on System 3 Click on Hardware 4 Click the Device Manager tab 5 In the Device Manager window scroll down the list of installed hardware devices until you find an entry for Universal serial bus controller 18 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer If this entry exists your host computer is set up for USB operation If this entry does not appear e Consult your computer documentation to see if USB must be enabled in the BIOS setup Configuring the Printer USB is a plug and play environment As such neither the printer nor the host requires user configuration to work However since the NCR solution simulates a serial communication interface you must configure handshaking on the printer for proper operation The printer can be configured to use hardware flow control using DTR DSR or software flow control using XON XOFF All other serial communication parameters i e baud rate parity st
121. current position by 13 receipt standard pitch or 10 slip or receipt compressed pitch The example shows how to set the relative position two columns in standard pitch 10 dots per column to the left of the current position 2 x 10 20 dots two columns to be moved left of the current position 65 536 20 65516 65 516 256 255 remainder of 236 n1 236 n2 255 To move to the right Determine the value of n by multiplying the number of columns to move right of the current position by 10 slip or receipt standard pitch or 8 receipt compressed pitch The example shows how to set the relative position two columns in standard pitch 10 dots per column to the right of the current position 2 x 10 20 dots two columns to be moved right of the current position 20 256 0 remainder of 20 n1 20 n2 0 Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H5C amp Chr n1 amp Chr n2 Related Information November 2002 117 7167 Owner s Manual 118 Chapter 6 Commands If the Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units command 1D 50 is used to change the horizontal and vertical minimum motion unit the parameters of this command Set Relative Print Position will be interpreted accordingly For more information see the description of the Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units command 1D 50 in this document Compatibility Information 7167 receipt vs 7156 receipt There is a difference in the
122. cy connection schemes e g serial RS 232 These advantages include e High Speed up to 12 MB second for high speed devices e Plug and Play Devices are automatically recognized and configured at installation e Hot plug Bus supports installation and removal of devices with the power applied e Up to 127 devices One host can support up to 127 devices with the use of hubs e Free ports Most PC architecture machines contain two USB ports in the base hardware These advantages have become attractive to the POS industry for a couple of reasons Additional POS devices Some POS systems are required to host more peripherals than can be supported by two RS 232 ports typical in a platform With the addition of one or two USB connectors the platform can now support the additional devices that had previously required a serial port expander card Higher bandwidths New devices coming into use have bandwidth requirements that are higher than the bandwidth that can be supported on legacy interfaces These devices include image scanners and printers As the speed and capability of POS printers increases the performance of the printer in an application can become limited by the speed of the communications interface USB provides ample bandwidth to support current and future POS printer requirements Advantages of the NCR USB Solution NCR has eliminated any cost associated with porting applications to USB by implementing a USB solution
123. d prints them on the receipt during the receipt test See Sample Print Test later in this chapter Serial number Model number CRC number Number of receipt lines printed Number of knife cuts Number of slip lines Number of slip characters Number of MICR reads Number of hours printer is on Number of flash cycles Maximum temperature reached Number of cutter jams Number of times the door is open November 2002 Chapter 4 Diagnostics 74 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Communication Chapter 5 Communication Communication Overview In order for a receipt to be printed a program must be in place that translates the data from the host computer into a language that the printer can understand This program must tell the printer exactly how to print each character This chapter describes how to create such a program or modify an existing one Interface In order for the printer to communicate with the host a communication link must be set up The 7167 supports the industry standard RS 232C communication interface This interface has a protocol associated with it that the host computer must understand and adhere The priner also supports USB communications Only when the interface parameters are matched and the proper protocol is used will the host and the printer be able to communicate See the section RS 232C Interface on the next page for a description of the protocol associated with the RS 232C interface Sendi
124. dd n Extra Dot Rows 107 17 Print 108 1B 32 Set Line Spacing to 1 6 Inch 109 1B 33 n Set Line Spacing 109 1B4An Print and Feed Paper 110 1B4Bn Print and Reverse Feed Paper 111 1B64n Print and Feed n Lines 112 1B65n Print and Reverse Feed n Lines 111 1D14n Reverse Feed n Lines 112 1D15n Reverse Feed n Dots 112 1D50xy Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion 113 Units Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 09 Horizontal Tab 114 1B14n Set Column 114 1B24n1n2 Set Absolute Starting Position 115 1B 44 n k 00 Set Horizontal Tabs 116 1B 5C n1 n2 Set Relative Print Position 117 1B61n Select Justification 118 1D 4C nL nH Set Left Margin 119 1D 57 nL nH Set Printing Area Width 120 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Print Characteristic Commands Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 12 Select Double Wide Characters 122 13 Select Single Wide Characters 122 1B 12 Select 90 Degree Counter Clockwise Rotated Print 123 1B16n Select Pitch Column Width 123 1B20n Set Character Right Side Spacing 124 1B21n Select Print Modes 126 1B25n Select or Cancel User Defined Character Set 127 1B 26 s c1 c2 d1 dn Define User Defined Characters 128 1B 2D n Select or Cancel Underline Mode 130 1B 3A 30 30 30 Copy Character Set from ROM to RAM 130 1B 3F n Cancel User Defined Characters 131 1B 45 n Select or Cancel Emphasi
125. defined 3 Undefined 4 Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to off 5 Undefined 6 Undefined 7 Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to off Slip Paper Status n 3 or n 51 Value of Byte Returned Slip Status 0 There is no more printing space on the current slip or the slip paper is not selected 1to8 Remaining print area on the current slip in number of lines at the currently set line spacing when the trailing edge sensor has become uncovered Until the trailing edge sensor becomes uncovered the value reported will be 6 because there are at least 6 lines remaining There can be 7 or 8 lines remaining when the slip line spacing has been set to less than 7 2 lines per inch 160 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Flash Memory Status n 4 or n 52 Bit OfffOn Hex Decimal Status for Transmit Status 0 Off 00 0 Undefined Fixed to off 1 Off 00 0 Undefined Fixed to off 2 Off 00 0 User data storage write successful On 04 4 User data storage write failed Specified area not erased 3 Off 00 0 Flash logo area adequate Definition stored On 08 8 Flash logo area not adequate for recent definition 4 Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to off 5 Off 00 0 No thermal user defined characters written to On 20 32 Flash Thermal user defined characters written to Flash 6 Off 00 0 No impact user defined characters written to On 04 64 Flash Impact user defined characters written to Flash 7 Off 00 0 Not used Fix
126. ds listed in bold are new or have additional functionality when compared to the NCR 7156 November 2002 T3 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands By Command Code All items in BOLD are new or have additional functionality when compared to the 7156 Hexadecimal Command Page Code and Operands Command Name 09 Horizontal Tab 114 0A Print and Feed Paper One Line 105 0c Print and Return to Standard Mode 181 0C Print and Eject Slip 105 0D Print and Carriage Return 106 10 Clear Printer 90 10 04n Real Time Status Transmission DLE Sequence 165 1005n Real Time Request to Printer GS Sequence 168 11 Close Form 91 12 Select Double Wide Characters 122 13 Select Single Wide Characters 122 14n Feed n Print Lines 106 15n Feed n Dot Rows 107 16n Add n Extra Dot Rows 107 17 Print 108 18 Open Form 91 18 Cancel Print Data in Page Mode 182 19 Perform Full Knife Cut 92 1A Perform Partial Knife Cut 92 1B bmp Download BMP Logo 142 1B 07 Generate Tone 93 1B 0C Print Data in Page Mode 182 1B 12 Select 90 Degree Counter Clockwise Rotated 123 Print 1B14n Set Column 114 1B16n Select Pitch Column Width 123 1B20n Set Character Right Side Spacing 124 1B 21 7 Select Print Modes 126 1B 24 n1 n2 Set Absolute Starting Position 115 1B 25n Select or Cancel User Defined Character Set 127 74 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands
127. e 4 Place the printer in the plastic bag and foam pack place the packed printer in the box and secure the box with packing tape 5 Ifyou are sending the printer to NCR for repair call your NCR authorized service representative for instructions on where to send the printer Be prepared to answer questions concerning shipping and billing Choosing a Location The 7167 printer takes up relatively little counter space and may be set on or near the host computer Make sure there is enough room to open the receipt cover to change the paper and to open the front cover to change the ribbon cassette The illustration shows the actual dimensions of the printer but leave several inches around the printer for connecting and accessing the cables Note The optional Magnetic Ink Character Recognition MICR check reader feature is designed to operate under a normal operating environment with a host computer However additional devices such as CRT monitors or large metal surfaces that are near the printer can affect the printer s magnetic field causing intermittent reading errors when the MICR check reader is in operation Relocating these devices may be required to prevent this interference November 2002 11 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer 174 mm 6 85 in 316 20 mm 12 50 in 190 mm 7 50 in c Wall mounted Power Supply Option The 75 watt power supply may be mounted on a vertical wall
128. e Page 863 French Canadian e PC Code Page 864 Arabic e PC Code Page 865 Nordic e PC Code Page 866 Cyrillic e PC Code Page 874 Thai e PC Code Page 1252 Windows Latin 1 e PC Code Page Katakana e Space Page e Code Page 932 e Code Page 936 e Code Page 949 e Code Page 950 16K RAM for downloaded character sets or bit mapped graphics such as logos Knife Cover open sensors Industry standard RS 232C and USB communication interface One cash drawer connector supports 2 cash drawers History EEROM for custom settings Audible tone controlled by application Note The 7167 does not have a paper journal The journal is kept electronically by the host computer Magnetic Ink Character Recognition MICR check reader built into the slip station for verifying checks includes custom MICR field parsing Extended slip table for handling large forms standard with MICR check reader Remote power supply Communication cables November 2002 3 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 1 About the 7167 Printer Thermal Print Head The 7167 Receipt Station uses a thermal print head for printing receipts and is extremely fast and quiet Since it uses heat to print directly on paper there is no cassette or ribbon to change eliminating soiled fingers and paper dust There is no regularly scheduled maintenance for the print head and it does not need to be regularly cleaned However if it does appear dirty wipe it with cotton swabs and rubbing al
129. e Ril RORIS MORES Kor as nen PRET DIR SSES VETE REID e e EUN aE Yawa WWW YS SAYS TR UR UR D640 DeFF a Se core peat ba REDEANT EP SS A ee sem FS TRI HT A ER BR KBE ED BEI ERES GS Ge SF Hk TO Sete EIE HIT ME BA SS BERERA S EEEH PAET RE RENE KE AAEE RE AZ HB AY SPT ERINRAR T kiss D740 D7FF RR CIO RMEE IESU RSS ERR ba it S M RETO SEDE RU ESSEASSRRLER ES RR MEK ER EE BS XE Hepatus BES BE Re E ae Th ete I SATE IA E HRA A HERE BEE UU ARAL REED BR AL ORT SNEED EWS ee November 2002 Appendix C 273 7167 Owner s Manual Code Pare 950 Traditional Chinese Cont D840 D8FF SEL SF Of BA fae RS as HE a ay ERT fal JA f de I Ge L a Aka D qq Aan Tk EA E DE TE SCR SEES E QC ES Ga A EA SR TRH He a Be a a DS USE MSIE SB IR RE tE Um SSE eM es Ii 55 iced is tI US Ei UR S UR IRIRA ph an ig i UR UE IE T Ett RA BERE S dn d D940 D9FF AE ded dead Ohl TIR Ree Hie SINR Bere A PEETA I H TA HUS DERBI IRURE FEHR IRR LET RUE SAGIT CUR pi aR I it HEEL IA Ea A RUBIA MUERE EO ede TERR Cara fede te a ERG ae aR IN UE ST UR DA40 DAFF SERA Rm ID MRR URS ROS RE eR AVRIL UNE ect NUR Sera IRL SE TS TR CURES RA nS SSR ERTS Ie ER TETAS EAR Re AD s E EGER as DEDE HQ ESER BEER A AE RAE ERE BR ule ero ERR TORTE A VESEIS Tee SoSH REMIS Teh Eu KURSE S LAE RR A AT Hg DB40 DBFF SUPR SS HAM Ee OL SH B SER RE E SEE SUEDE RS Hee FREER SW ERU MEO HEAT Ce RARER S 24 2546 Bs 863 U EE Fa titl 3 RS h
130. e normal size characters Double wide and double high characters are printed in the same orientation double high characters cannot be printed on the slip station They may also be mixed on the same line Upside Down Rotated CW Rotated CCW Resulting Output 1B 7B n 1B 56 n 1B 12 Canceled Canceled Cleared ABC Canceled Set X gt WO Set Canceled X Sq v Set Set X OM X X Set mo Note The following print modes cannot be mixed on the same line 1 Standard and compressed pitch 2 Vertical normal and rotated 3 Right side up and upside down 4 Single high normal and double high November 2002 141 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Graphics Commands 142 These commands are used to enter and print graphics data and are described in order of their hexadecimal codes Download BMP Logo ASCII ESC BMP file data Hexadecimal 1B BMP file data Decimal 27 BMP file data Value Maximum width 576 Maximum height 512 Enters a BMP file data into RAM or Flash This command is used by sending the file data of a monochrome BMP file preceded by a 0 x 1B The bit map is stored in the printer in the same manner as a down loaded bit image The downloaded BMP file can be printed by using the Print Downloaded Bit Image 1D 2F m command Example 1 MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B 2 Open bitmapfile For Binary As filehandle 3 filecontent Input LOF filehandle filehandle 4 MSComm1 Output file
131. e two entries for your NCR printer Select the printer name and click Properties Select the Details tab then press the Details button to start the Edgeport utility Click the Advanced tab oO Q m Click the Uninstall button and follow the on screen instructions November 2002 37 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer EN Edgeport Properties x r COM Por Assignment General Version Advanced ARNING Pressing the Uninstall button will Uninstall remove the Edgeport device drivers from our system Based on converter serial number Default C Basedon physical USB port Y ou must reboot before these settings can TIEN take effect Windows NT Windows NT users will need to run the Edgeport Configuration Utility to uninstall the drivers 1 2 3 4 5 Press Windows Start Menu button Choose Programs then Inside Out Networks Utilities Choose Edgeport Configuration Utility Click the Advanced tab Click the Uninstall button and follow the on screen instructions Windows 2000 N gv Dr 09 38 Open the Device Manager and make sure View Devices By Type is selected Scroll down to Universal serial bus controller and expand the list by pressing the symbol You ll see two entries for your NCR printer Select the printer name and click Properties Select the Details tab then press the Details button to start the Edgeport utility Clic
132. e up Flash Memory A logo defined following this command is not preserved over a power cycle n 49 ASCII n 1 Loads active logo to Flash Memory This is the default condition for logo Flash storage A logo defined following this command is stored in Flash Memory n 50 ASCII n 2 Loads user defined characters to RAM only This is the default condition for user defined character storage Any user defined characters defined following this command are not preserved over a power cycle n 51 ASCII n 3 Loads user defined characters to Flash Memory An application must use this command to store user defined characters in Flash Memory Any user defined characters defined following this command are stored in Flash Memory A user defined character cannot be redefined in Flash Memory The Flash Memory page must be erased by an application before redefining user defined characters For more information see the Erase User Flash Sector 1D 40 n command Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H22 amp Chr n November 2002 203 7167 Owner s Manual 204 Chapter 6 Commands Flash Allocation ASCII GS Unin Hexadecimal 1D 2255 n1 n2 Decimal 2934 85 n1 n2 Default Value 1 see below of n1 Default Value 1 see below of n2 n1 is the number of 64k sectors used for logos and user defined characters n2 is the number of 64k sectors used for user data storage This command sets the allocation of Flash
133. eI NE FO mIRC CE EUN D ED40 EDFF 40 RU ie at FE A HE tak AE Hk A 50 HEN pet LA led della 60 FUATA ERRES SG RR 70 MRS Se ete a AO AR RSE SE Fm 0 OFS ik eS OAR OR Nh OT OG BO PARRA eae Abt dh debates CO Faia Be ie eS 0S YES aa E AE Er DO AM Ae ASA AR ARAM ASE HE RR AEE Oe NS SR EO tee SE Se Ye FP Sl P UM FO MEM ead FE BM Ae kw a ak Fk EE40 EEFF 40 HOEREGAIRADATNE oe BR E S0 ieee phd Eel dele 60 Si SHRI GS esl KYLEE s C w 70 iE RUE AR A He IS UAE a AO K e lol ela ied TREA FO MIRS AERE EF40 EFFF 40 PERERIN Gee ae SF SA E BN ATA 50 K ET TE Huet G0 BEEDEREEREEGEZ Be EE SU RC REA AL 70 Rea A DATA ROSA AO SAN ANE ae te UREN RE REIR NTH BO RURU KM UL EE RB Be OR NETT EL EUR TA LI Es DO ENAERE EIEEEI SOR EO HUSHERE EHE ROUEN NES ee rng ETE UAE November 2002 Appendix C 216 7167 Owner s Manual Code Pare 950 Traditional Chinese Cont F040 FOFF Si FG ER eR FW SE WE i UQ UR LEE T n idt a e th 3L Saw ETE E dup BEAR AURA IRIURE ORDERS ERO EE rip e geek DR OR GUR IE BORN META UIS RE Be eS ER EE pei t F140 F1FF Lise deed pe yer Fe SSS OS Hi RE EE TE pipi EMO RUMBA RORWEREES PERO IE RELCEG RR RE LE ERA ER Hired e reran deti BUE Fe RENS EL en e BENE MAAR Re Ae PA SN Sm Ee Mes SE US EE BAH RICK TA t Ee UR EEUU REL SS oboa kd E F240 F2FF ARUBA UICE LEON ORAE EG MU Pel tee Le eae BB NS A CR SUEDE eee ci rt E EGET EEG LAE NUN em ma hh EN RAI PRECEDE Cres fi TILL
134. eceipt to tally verify AE 174 Cover openings Clear Cover openings tally to 0 tally AF 175 Cover openings Return Cover openings tally returns 10 tally bytes l B2 178 Max Temperature Clear Max temp tally tally B3 179 Max Temperature Return Max Temperature tally returns 10 tally bytes 1 B4 180 Slip lines tally Write to NVRAM 8 digit ASCII numeric max 99 999 999 B5 181 Slip lines tally Write to NVRAM and print on receipt to verify B6 182 Slip lines tally Clear Slip lines tally to 0 1 B7 183 Slip lines tally Return Slip Lines tally returns 10 bytes Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H49 amp Chr amp H40 amp Chr n amp CHR amp HOD November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Transmit Status ASCII GSrn Hexadecimal 1D72n Decimal 29114n Value of n 1 49 printer status 2 50 cash drawer status 3 51 slip paper status 4 52 Flash Memory status Transmits the status specified by n This is a batch mode command which transmits the response after all prior data in the receive buffer has been processed There may be a time lag between the printer receiving this command and transmitting the response depending on the receive buffer status When DTR DSR RS232C communications handshaking control is selected the printer transmits the one byte response only when the host signal DSR indicates it is ready to receive data When XON XOFF RS232C communi
135. eck reader transaction or the check numbers will not be read accurately 5 6 48 Remove the check after it has been fed all the way back out Follow the instructions from the host computer to finish the transaction November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual ENDORSE HERE DO NOT WRITE STAMP OR SIGN BELOW THIS LINE RESERVED FOR FINANCIAL INSTITUTION USE Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer November 2002 49 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Solving Problems Chapter 3 Solving Problems The 7167 printer is a simple generally trouble free printer but from time to time minor problems may occur For example the power supply may be interrupted or the thermal print head may overheat A green LED on the operator panel signals that something may be wrong For some problems the printer communicates the information to the host computer and relies on the application to indicate what the problem is The information on the following pages describes some problems that you may encounter problems that you can easily fix and others that you will need to contact a service representative for You may be able to correct many of the conditions or problems without calling for service However if a problem persists contact a service representative See Contacting a Service Representative at the end of this chapter Green LED Does Not Come On Printer Will Not Print Problem What to Do Where to Go Cables may not be
136. ed at beginning resulting in a fully numeric nine character transit number All nine characters in the transit number because there are no dashes All characters in the account number up to 18 with spaces and dashes removed Always four characters in the check number zero filled if check number is only three characters long Final Carriage Return November 2002 195 7167 Owner s Manual 196 Chapter 6 Commands ESCwpT A C S CR All characters in the transit number Field separator All characters in the account number Field separator All characters in the check number Field separator Two digit status Final Carriage Return Notes All parameters are ASCII characters i e greater than or equal to 0x20 with the exception of a non ASCII character enclosed in single quotes as a field separator This applies both to parameter specifications sent from application to printer and to MICR data returned from printer to application Parameters are positional their order in the parameter string is the order in which the parsed MICR data will be returned Unrecognized parameters will be ignored and processing of the parsing parameters will stop Any data remaining after the unrecognized parameter will be treated as normal input data If parameters are not defined for example 1B 77 50 CR or 1B 77 70 lt CR gt parsing is not selected One status byte followed by all decoded MICR characters will be returned Th
137. ed to off Range of n 1 4 49 52 Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H72 amp Chr n Exceptions When n is out of the specified range the command is ignored Send Printer Software Version ASCII US V Hexadecimal 1F 56 Decimal 31 86 The printer returns 8 bytes containing the boot and Flash software version The first 4 bytes returned are an ASCII string for the boot version The second 4 bytes are an ASCII string for the boot version Example for 1 234 56 8bytes the boot version is 1 23 and the Flash version is 4 56 Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1F amp Chr amp H56 November 2002 161 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Recognizing Data from the Printer An application sending various Real Time and non Real Time commands to which the printer responds can determine which command a response belongs to by the table below Responses to Transmit Peripheral Device Status 1B 75 and Transmit Paper Sensor Status 1B 76 are non Real Time responses and will arrive in the order in which they were solicited Batch Mode Response Response Recognized By ASCII HEX ESC u 0 1B750 0 0 0 0 0 x x Binary ESC v 1B76 0 0 0 0 X x x Binary GSIn 1D49n 0 X x 0 x x x x Binary GSrn 1D72n 0 X x 0 x x x x Binary Real Time Response Response Recognized By ASCII HEX GSEOTn 1D04n 0 x x 1 x x 1 0 Binary DLEEOT 1004n 0 x x 1 x x 1 0 Binary n GS ENQ 1D 05 1 X X X X X x x Binary XON 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
138. efinition is used The inactive definition is not erased from Flash and continues to take up space in Flash Memory When this command precedes a logo print command and n is different from the previously active logo selected the printer retrieves the logo definition for n from Flash Memory and prints it If there is no definition for logo n then no logo is printed In the case of a previously existing application that expects only one possible logo the printer will not receive the Select Current Logo 1D 23 n command In this case the printer assigns 0 as the active logo identifier It automatically stores any new logo definition in Flash Memory as logo 0 inactivating any previous logo 0 definition If the Flash Memory space available for logos fills up with inactive logo 0 definitions the November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands firmware erases the old definitions at the next power cycle This is the only case in which the printer erases Flash Memory without an application command In the case of a new application using multiple logos the Select Current Logo 1D 23 n command is used After that the printer no longer automatically erases the logo definition Flash Memory page when it fills with multiple definitions A new application using multiple logos writing a user defined character set into Flash Memory or both is responsible for erasing the logo and user defined character set Flash Memory page when the logo are
139. ember 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Values and Ranges Receipt c the ASCII codes of the first c1 and last c2 characters respectively cl Hex 20 FF Hex 20 is always printed as a space c2 Hex 20 FF Hex 20 is always printed as a space To define only one character use the same code for both c1 and c2 n the number of dot columns for the nth character as specified by n1 nn n 1 10 standard pitch 12 and less accepted but ignored n 1 8 compressed pitch 12 and less accepted but ignored d the column data for the nth character as specified by d1 dn The number of bytes for a particular character cell is 3 x n1 The bytes are printed down and across each cell Slip c the ASCII codes of the first c1 and last c2 characters respectively cl Hex 20 FF Hex 20 is always printed as a space c2 Hex 20 FF Hex 20 is always printed as a space To define only one character use the same code for both c1 and c2 d the column data for the nth character as specified by d1 dn Each character is defined by 12 bytes only bytes 2 11 are printed Each byte is one 7 dot high column full or half dot column Overlapped dots are not printed The data must contain c2 cl 1 x 12 bytes Related Information See 1D 22 n Select Memory Type Where to Save User Defined Fonts November 2002 129 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select or Cancel Underline Mode ASCII ESC 7
140. er and feeds paper one line Executes LF on receipt Executes LF on slip if previous character was not a CR Example MSComm 1 Output Chr amp H17 108 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Set Line Spacing to 1 6 Inch ASCII ESC 2 Hexadecimal 1B 32 Decimal 2750 Default 0 13 Inch 3 33 mm Sets the default line spacing to 1 6 of an inch 4 25 mm Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H32 Set Line Spacing ASCII ESC3n Hexadecimal 1B337 Decimal 2751n Value ofn 1 406 inches on receipt 1 144 inches in slip Range of n 0 255 Default Receipt 13 inch 3 37 mm or 7 52 lines per inch 3 extra dot rows Slip 14 inch 7 2 lines per inch 3 extra dot rows Sets the line spacing for the receipt and for the slip For the receipt the spacing is set to n 406 inches For the slip the line spacing is set to n 144 inches The line spacing equals the character height when n is too small If the Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units command 1D 50 is used to change the horizontal and vertical minimum motion unit the parameters of this command Set Line Spacing will be interpreted accordingly Related Information For more information see the description of the Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units command in this document November 2002 109 7167 Owner s Manual 110 Chapter 6 Commands Print and Feed Paper ASCII ESCJn Hexadecimal 1B4An
141. er commands are made up of one or more bytes of data starting with a command control code followed by its supporting parameters Commands control all operations and functions of the printer This includes selecting the size and placement of characters and graphics on the receipt or the slip and feeding and cutting the paper Unless otherwise noted any of the commands may be used in any combination to communicate with the printer from a program in a host computer In order to allow the graceful handling of commands that may be available in other printers but are not available in this printer some commands will be listed and described but identified as not implemented If the printer receives one of these not implemented commands the command and its supporting operands will be discarded Any other data bytes including unrecognized commands are sent to the print buffer as data and the printer will attempt to print the data when it is instructed to print the buffer List of Commands and Location This section presents groups of lists of the hexadecimal command codes parameters and the command names A page reference is provided for the page on which the command is more fully described If this document is being viewed online the page reference will be linked to the actual page and may clicked to go to that page The first section lists all of the commands The following lists are separated into functional category groupings All comman
142. erials and finish are durable and resistant to these items Cleaning solutions Lubricants Fuels Cooking oils Ultraviolet light There is no scheduled maintenance required for the 7167 Clean the cabinet as needed to remove dust and finger marks Use any household cleaner designed for plastics but test it first on a small unseen area If the receipt bucket is dirty wipe it with a clean damp cloth Cleaning the Thermal Print Head Caution Do not spray or try to clean the thermal print head or the inside of the printer with any kind of cleaner as this may damage the thermal print head and electronics If the thermal print head appears dirty wipe it with cotton swabs and rubbing alcohol If spotty or light printing problems persist after the thermal print head has been cleaned see Chapter 3 Solving Problems for more information Note The thermal print head does not normally require cleaning if the recommended paper grades are used If non recommended paper has been used for an extended period of time cleaning the print head with cotton swabs and rubbing alcohol will not be of much benefit See Ordering Paper and Supplies earlier in this manual for recommended paper 8 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer What Is in the Box The following items are packed in the shipping box Printer enclosed in a plastic bag and foam
143. errupts including communications To provide feedback to the application the printer responds to the application when the erase is complete After sending the Erase User Flash Sector 1D 40 n command an application should wait for the response from the printer before sending data Otherwise data will be lost If an application is unable to receive data it should wait a minimum of five seconds after sending the Erase User Flash Sector 1D 40 n command before sending data Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H40 amp Chr n November 2002 205 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Printer Setting Change ASCII USDC1 mn m n mn OFFH Hexadecimal 1F 11 m n m n m n OFFH Decimal 3117 mn m n m n OFFH Value of m n m Function n Function Hex Hex 10 Interface type 00 USB RS232C 01 RS232C 02 USB 11 Baud rate 00 115200 bps 01 57600 bps 02 38400 bps 03 19200 bps 04 9600 bps 05 4800 bps 06 2400 bps 07 1200 bps 12 Number of data bit 00 8 data bits 01 7 data bits 13 Number of stop bit 00 1 stop bits 01 2 stop bits 14 Parity 00 No parity 01 Even parity Odd parity 15 Flow control 00 Software XON XOFF 01 Hardware DTR DSR 16 Data reception errors 00 Ignore errors option 01 Print 2 17 One Line Buffer 00 4 K Buffer 01 Single Line Buffer 64 bytes 19 Printer ID mode 00 7158 Native ID 01 Emulated Printer ID 02 7167 Native ID 20 Emulation 00 7158 Nat
144. es 353 mm 0139 inches 3 66 mm 144 inches mlolala November 2002 220 7167 Owner s Manual Print Zones Receipt Station Appendix B Print Characteristics This section shows the printable area for the slip station and the receipt station For 80 mm Paper The receipt station centers characters standard pitch and compressed pitch and graphics on an 80 mm wide 3 15 inches receipt Standard pitch 13 x 24 dots in character cell 44 characters columns per line Compressed pitch 10 x 24 dots in character cell 56 characters columns per line Double byte character 24 x 24 dots in character cell 24 characters columns per line Graphics 576 addressable bits The minimum print line height is 24 dots for characters and 24 dots for graphics The standard print line height is 27 dots 3 38 mm 133 inches for characters with three extra dot rows See the following illustration not to scale Paper Width 80 mm 3 15 inc Top Margin 17 5 mm 69 in Minimum Print Zone 72 10 mm 2 84 in 576 Dots Left and Right Margins 3 95 mm 16 in For 58 mm Paper The receipt station centers characters standard pitch and compressed pitch and graphics on an 58 mm wide 2 28 inches receipt Standard pitch 13 x 24 dots in character cell 32 characters columns per line Compressed pitch 10 x 24 dots in character cell 42 characters columns per line Double byte character 24 x 2
145. escriptions of these individual commands in this chapter indicate the differences in how they operate in the two modes Limitations Page mode is only implemented on the receipt station in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode only Print and Return to Standard Mode ASCII FF Hexadecimal OC Decimal 12 The processed data is printed and the printer returns to Standard Mode The developed data is deleted after being printed This command has the same code as the Print and Eject Slip command which is executed when the printer is not in Page Mode Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp HOC Exceptions This command is enabled only in Page Mode November 2002 181 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Cancel Print Data in Page Mode ASCII CAN Hexadecimal 18 Decimal 24 Deletes all the data to be printed in the page area Any data from the previously selected page area that is also part of the current data to be printed is deleted This command has the same code as the Open Form command which is performed when the printer is not in Page Mode Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H18 Exceptions This command is only used in Page Mode Print Data in Page Mode ASCII ESC FF Hexadecimal 1B0C Decimal 2712 Collectively prints all buffered data in the printing area After printing the printer does not clear the buffered data and sets values for Select Print Direction in Page Mode 1B 54 n
146. ese following describes the commands for the printing of bar codes and described in the order of their hexadecimal codes Note 7156 firmware can be set for module widths in bar codes ranging from 2 dots to 4 dots per module DPM for the narrow modules The default is 3 DPM 7167 firmware ranges from 1 dot per module to 5 dots per module DPM printed on the receipt The default is 2 DPM Select Printing Position for HRI Characters ASCII GSHn Hexadecimal 1D 487 Decimal 2972n Value of n Printing position 0 Not printed 1 Above the bar code 2 Below the bar code 3 Both above and below the bar code Default 0 Not printed Prints HRI Human Readable Interface characters above or below the bar code Example MSComm 1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H48 amp Chr n November 2002 175 7167 Owner s Manual Select Pitch for HRI Characters ASCIL GSfn Hexadecimal 1D 66 n Decimal 29102n Value of n Pitch 0 Standard Pitch at 15 2 CPI on receipt 1 Compressed Pitch at 19 CPI on receipt Default 0 Standard Pitch at 15 2 CPI Selects standard or compressed font for printing Bar Code characters When slip is selected as the interface HRI is always compressed Example MSComm 1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H66 amp Chr n Select Bar Code Height ASCII GShn Hexadecimal 1D 68 n Decimal 29104n Value of n Number of dots Range ofn 1 255 Default 162 Sets the bar code height to n dot
147. ess 0 Ordering Other Supplies eee ret rire teer eite Ordering Documentation Cleaning the Printer eter pet eget err e Ht ee MERE e rt ren Cleaning the Cabinet acere e emet e ree dre Cleaning the Thermal Print Head sss Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer What Is in the Box a esee ten ire RES NOE aaia rE REER NEN ERR RE ERa Removing the Packing Material sse Re Packing the Printer neo oTt ero RR Choosing a Location eerta en tir P SERRE REPERI qasa c Wall mounted Power Supply Option sse Setting SWitCh S usu tite niei ie ent rater ret ira eite e ENN Ei heri gaid Printer Reset HR A About the Universal Serial Bus sse Advantages of USB connections sese Advantages of the NCR USB Solution sse Checking for USB Support on the Host Computer sse Host Configuration aaa trente ii e a EREE Configuring the Printer esten N i ostro ndr atten ayapa Installing the USB Printer Drivers 0000 i Checking the Irnstallati n annee ntt tte teret ted Configuring Serial Port Number Assignments sse Running the Edgeport Utility sss November 2002 vii 7167 Owner s Manual Contents Serial Port Configuration Methods sse Uninstalling the Drivers si sisi er iere reet prepara Using the Printer aa y i beri e bete urb e Rer Sas Enter qasa
148. eter Length Width 80 mm max 3 15 in 83 meters 273 ft 80mm 5mm 3 15 008 in The paper must not be attached at the core Otherwise the receipt station will be damaged when the paper is exhausted Paper grades available from NCR Paper Stock Paper Grade Description 856911 Economy for text printing 856966 Standard Sensitivity for text and simple graphics 878559 High Sensitivity for text bar codes amp detailed graphics 856380 For improved archiveability and added resistance to incompatible substances 856461 Red Black 856458 Blue Black The paper must not be attached at the core Otherwise the receipt station will be damaged when the paper is exhausted To order thermal receipt paper contact your sales representative or order from NCR at the following address or toll free number NCR Media Products Division 9995 Washington Church Road Miamisburg OH 45342 Voice 1 800 543 8130 toll free or local listing of The NCR Media Products sales office It is critical that only certified thermal paper be used with this printer otherwise damage may result causing poor print quality or cause damage to the printer November 2002 5 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 1 About the 7167 Printer Ordering Forms The 7167 prints on single or multiple part forms in the slip station up to five part forms Forms and slips must meet the following requirements Front insertion minimum 51 mm 2 0 inches wide 70 mm 2
149. exadecimal 1B 47 1B 47 7 Decimal 2771 2771n Value of n 0 Off 1 On Turns double strike mode on for the slip station Overprints a second pass of the print line on the slip station to improve penetration of multi part forms and increase print contrast The second pass is printed the same direction as the first to ensure accuracy of the overprint The printer is reset to the standard print mode after a line has been printed or after a Clear Printer 0x10 command is received Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H47 amp Chr n Exceptions These settings do not apply in Page Mode However they can be set or cleared in Page Mode Double strike printing cannot be used with bit images or downloaded bit images This command functions the same as the 7156 when the printer is in 7156 Emulation Mode In Native Mode the command takes a parameter to enable and disable it Related Information Printer output is the same as in Emphasized Mode November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Cancel Double Strike ASCII ESCH Hexadecimal 1B 48 Decimal 27 72 Turns off double strike mode on the slip station in 7156 Emulation Mode This command is ignored in the 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode This command works on both slip and receipt stations Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H48 Select or Cancel Italic Print ASCII ESCIn Hexadecimal 1B 49n Decimal 2773n V
150. f 00 0 Slip paper selected On 04 4 Receipt paper selected 3 Off 00 0 Not waiting for slip On 08 8 Waiting for slip 4 On 10 16 Fixed to On 5 Off 00 0 Slip leading edge sensor paper preset On 20 32 Slip leading edge sensor no paper 6 Off 00 0 Slip trailing edge sensor paper preset On 40 64 Slip trailing edge sensor no paper 7 Off 00 0 Fixed to Off Real Time Request to Printer GS Sequence DLE Sequence ASCII GSETXn or DLE ENQ 7 Hexadecimal 1D03n or 1005n Decimal 293n or 165n Value of n 1 Recover and restart 2 Recover and clear buffers 3 Cancel slip waiting The printer responds to a request from the host specified by n This command includes two sequences GS and DLE The operations performed depend on the value of n according to the following parameters n 1 Restarts printing from the beginning of the line where an error occurred after recovering from the error Print settings that are normally preserved from line to line such as character height and width are still preserved with this command This sequence is ignored except when the printer is busy due to an error condition If the receipt is selected this command will attempt recovery from a knife error Other errors associated with the receipt such as paper out or print head overheating can be recovered from only by clearing the specific condition such as loading paper or letting the print head cool down November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chap
151. for USB Support 2 Scroll down to Universal serial bus controllers The following devices should be displayed NCR 7167 Printer NCR 7167 Serial Ports Port where the is the location of the printer November 2002 33 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer System Properties x General Device Manager Hardware Profiles Performance C View devices by type View devices by connection m Advanced Configuration and Power Interface ACPI BIOS B Dial Up Adapter NCR 7167 Serial Ports Port 11 A COM3 7167 Portt Port 11 lt NEC IE PC Interface Card m Processor support System board Properties Refresh Remove Print 3 Scroll back up to Ports You should see a COM number and port description for the NCR printer If the devices are missing or are not listed correctly the installation wasn t successful You will need to reinstall the drivers Windows NT Go the Windows Start button and select Programs gt InsideOut Networks Utilities gt Edgeport Configuration Utility A window opens that contains the name of the printer and the port assignment If this information is not listed then the installation was not successful You will need to reinstall the drivers 34 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Programs s E Ll EI St ra n W
152. hardware device To continue click Next Cancel Found New Hardware Wizard n Install Hardware Device Drivers Aa wasa 4 device driver is a software program that enables a hardware device to work with CY an operating system This wizard will complete the installation for this device e 7167 device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work Windows needs driver files for your new device To locate driver files and complete the installation click Next What do you want the wizard to do Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended C Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that can choose a specific driver lt Back Cancel November 2002 29 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Found New Hardware Wizard Locate Driver Files Where do you want Windows to search for driver files Search for driver files for the following hardware device e 7167 The wizard searches for suitable drivers in its driver database on your computer and in any of the following optional search locations that you specify To start the search click Next If you are searching on a floppy disk or CD ROM drive insert the floppy disk or CD before clicking Next Optional search locations Floppy disk drives v CD ROM drives TN Found New Hardware Wizard Driver Files Search Results ua wass The wizard has finished sear
153. he Paper Feed Button for the carriage return usage you want November 2002 65 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics SET CARRIAGE RETURN USAGE YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Ignore CR gt Long Click Use CR as Print Cmd gt Short Click Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Asian Mode This function makes it possible for the user to select an Asian character for the printer Gee Configuring the Printer for instructions on how to enter the Configuration Menu to change this setting Note For Asian code pages only one either 932 936 949 or 950 will exist in the firmware Press the Paper Feed Button for the Asian mode you want SET ASIAN MODE YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Asian Mode On gt Long Click Asian Mode Off gt Short Click Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Slip Printing Width This function allows for the 7197 printer to be set in a mode that allows for the printer to drop the left 21 columns of data For example if the printer was connected to an application that was sending data for a 7158 printer which supports 66 columns of print the 7167 printer could replace the 7158 without application changes Press the Paper Feed Button for the slip printing width option you want SET SLIP PRINTING WIDTH YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click 7167 MO
154. he Printer Advancing Paper 1 Press the Paper Feed button on the operator panel to advance the paper The cover must be closed To ensure print quality and the proper alignment of the paper advance about 30 cm 12 inches of paper 2 Tear off the excess paper against the tear off blade November 2002 43 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Installing and Changing the Ribbon Cassette Change the ribbon cassette when the print is too light or the ribbon is frayed Removing the Ribbon Cassette 1 Open the front cover 2 Use the handle on the cassette and pull the cassette from the printer 44 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Installing the Ribbon Cassette 1 Tighten the ribbon by turning the knob in the direction of the arrow 2 Position the ribbon cassette slot at the catch on the printer slip frame and push it into place Be sure the ribbon is in front of or underneath the print head Tighten the ribbon using the shaft at the upper left corner of the cassette Rotate the shaft clockwise until the ribbon is positioned between the print head and the metal ribbon guide 3 Close the front cover Slot November 2002 45 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Printing on Forms or Checks There are several types of transactions that require you to insert a form or check into the printer Credit card t
155. he first method is the default method that automatically assigns a serial port number to the printer The other two methods require the user to specify a port number These methods are described more fully in Serial Port Configuration Methods on the following page Running the Edgeport Utility You ll need to run the Edgeport utility to check which serial port has been assigned to the printer This utility queries and configures the operating system and driver for the information regarding the virtual serial port Windows 98 1 Open the Device Manager and make sure View Devices By Type is selected 2 Scroll down to Universal serial bus controller and expand the list by pressing the symbol You ll see two entries for your NCR printer 36 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer 3 Select the printer name and click Properties 4 Select the Details tab then press the Details button to start the Edgeport utility Windows NT 4 0 From the Windows Start menu select Programs gt Inside Out Networks Utilities gt Edgeport Configuration Utility Windows 2000 1 Open the Device Manager and make sure View Devices By Type is selected 2 Scroll down to Universal serial bus controller and expand the list by pressing the symbol You ll see two entries for your NCR printer Select the printer name and click Properties 4 Select the Details tab then press the Details button t
156. hows that with a pause of 50 milliseconds after each line the transmit time equals or exceeds the print time slowing down the printer regardless of the baud rate Char Line Lines Receipt Transmit Time 9600 Baud Transmit Time 19 2 K Baud Print Time 20 20 1 4 Seconds 1 2 Seconds 1 2 Seconds 20 40 2 8 Seconds 2 4 Seconds 2 4 Seconds 44 20 1 88 Seconds 1 44 Seconds 1 2 Seconds 44 40 3 76 Seconds 2 88 Seconds 2 4 Seconds The next table shows that with no delay between lines the transmit time is much less than the print time allowing the printer to print at full speed Char Line Lines Receipt Transmit Time 9600 Baud Transmit Time 19 2 K Baud Print Time 20 20 0 4 Seconds 0 2 Seconds 1 2 Seconds 20 40 0 8 Seconds 0 4 Seconds 2 4 Seconds 44 20 0 88 Seconds 0 44 Seconds 1 2 Seconds 44 40 1 76 Seconds 0 88 Seconds 2 4 Seconds November 2002 73 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Communication XON XOFF Protocol The XON XOFF characters coordinate the information transfer between the printer and the host computer The printer sends an XON character when it is ready to receive data and it sends an XOFF character when it cannot accept any more data The software on the host computer must monitor the communication link as shown in the following flowchart in order to send data at the appropriate times If XON XOFF has been selected the printer also toggles the DTR signal as described in the next section but it does not look at the DS
157. hr amp H61 amp Chr n Exceptions If n 0 ASB is disabled Related Information When Auto Status Back ASB is enabled using this command the status transmitted by other commands and the ASB status are differentiated according to the information found in Recognizing Data from the printer in the Real Time Commands section in this chapter The status bytes to be transmitted are described in the following four tables Byte1 printer information Byte2 error information Byte3 paper sensor information Byte4 paper sensor information First Byte Printer Information Bit Off On Hex Decimal Status for ASB Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to off 1 Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to off 2 Off 00 0 One or both cash drawers open On 04 4 Both cash drawers closed 3 Off 00 0 Not Busy at the RS232C interface On 08 8 Printer is Busy at the RS232C interface On 10 16 Not used Fixed to on 5 Off 00 0 Receipt cover closed On 20 32 Receipt cover open 6 Off 00 0 Paper Feed Button is not pressed On 40 64 Paper Feed Button is pressed 7 Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to off November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Second Byte Error information Bit 0 1 2 Off On Off Hex 00 04 00 08 00 00 20 00 40 00 Decimal S S o O O 64 Third Byte Paper Sensor Information Bit OfflOn Off Off Hex 00 01 00 02 00 04 00 08 00 00 20 00 40 00 Decimal S o O OJIN O o Q
158. ial Knife Cut ASCII SUB or ESC m Hexadecimal 1A Or 1B 6D Decimal 26 Or 27 109 Cuts the receipt leaving 20 inch 5 mm of paper This command is implemented the same as Full Knife Cut 19 1B 69 which results in a partial knife cut There are two codes for this command and both perform the same function This command is processed regardless of which station is selected Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1A or MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H6D Exceptions A line Feed is executed first if the printer buffer is not empty This command is executed cuts the receipt regardless of which station is selected November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Generate Tone ASCII ESC BEL Hexadecimal 1B 07 Decimal 27 7 Generates an audible tone This allows the application to provide an audible tone to the operator Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H07 Return Home ASCII ESC lt Hexadecimal 1B 3C Decimal 27 60 Moves the impact print head unless it is already in the home position to the home position This command is processed regardless of station either receipt unit or slip unit Related Information The printer is able to detect carriage motor jams eliminating the need to home the print head after each slip transaction Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H3C November 2002 93 7167 Owner s Manual Initialize
159. ick NO gt Short Click 8 Data Bits Long Click 7 Data Bits gt Short Click SET NUMBER OF STOP BITS YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click 1 Stop Bits gt Long Click 2 Stop Bits gt Short Click SET PARITY YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click No Parity gt 1 Click Even Parity gt 2 Clicks Odd Parity gt 3 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate SET FLOW CONTROL METHOD YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Software XON XOFF gt Long Click Hardware DTR DSR gt Short Click SET DATA RECEPTION ERRORS OPTION YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Ignore Errors gt Long Click Print gt Short Click Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Receive Buffer Size Option This function allows the user to set the buffer size to a single line or a 4 K buffer Press the Paper Feed Button for the option you want November 2002 59 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics SET RECEIVE BUFFER SIZE YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click 4K Buffer gt Long Click One Line gt Short Click Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Save Parameters This function allows to save the selected communication settings or return to the communication settings to select additional options Press the Paper Feed Button fo
160. id Blocks There are restrictions on the duty cycle because of the heat generated by the receipt thermal print head when printing solid blocks regardless of the length of the block in relation to the print line The restrictions are ambient temperature the percentage of time measured against one minute of continuous solid printing and the amount of coverage Caution When the duty cycle approches the limits shown in the table the receipt print head will heat up and shut down This may damage the print head November 2002 215 7167 Owner s Manual 216 Appendix A Specifications To avoid this problem do one or a combination of the following 1 Reduce the amount of coverage 2 Reduce the time of continuous solid printing 3 Reduce the ambient temperature Amount of Solid Coverage 95 C 20 40 100 100 of 1 min continuous printing 50 of 1 min continuous printing 20 of 1 min continuous printing Ambient Temperature 35 C 50 of 1 min continuous printing 25 of 1 min continuous printing 10 of 1 min continuous printing November 2002 50 C 20 of 1 min continuous printing 10 of 1 min continuous printing 3 of 1 min continuous printing 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix B Print Characteristics Appendix B Print Characteristics Character Size This section shows the dot pattern for characters printed on the receipt and slip stations Receipt Stati
161. indows 2000 1 Open the Device Manager window as you did in Checking for USB Support 2 Scroll down to Universal serial bus controllers BY Computer C Disk drives Display adapters DYD CD ROM drives 5 Floppy disk controllers J Floppy disk drives H 6 IDE ATA ATAPI controllers 5 88 Keyboards B Mice and other pointing devices se Monitors H A Multi port serial adapters Network adapters Ports COM amp LPT ep Sound video and game controllers Ed System devices E Universal Serial Bus controllers USB Root Hub pi Intel 82371ABJEB PCI to USB Universal Host Controller November 2002 35 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer 3 Scroll back up to Ports If the devices are missing or are not listed correctly the installation wasn t successful You will need to reinstall the drivers If this information is not listed then the installation was not successful You will need to reinstall the drivers Edgeport Properties X General Version Advanced Information Port1 COM3 Configure Port Flags Test Ports ERU Configuring Serial Port Number Assignments This section described how the NCR USB solution assigns serial port numbers e g COM to the printer The information that determines the assigned port number is stored in the host computer and not in the printer This assignment is made in one of three ways T
162. ing should only be changed if the option is added or removed Press the Paper Feed Button for the option you want SET CHECK FLIP OPTION YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Enable Check Flip gt Long Disable Check Flip gt Short Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Color Paper Option This function allows the user to set the color paper for the receipt thermal printer to one color paper or two color paper Press the Paper Feed Button for the option you want SET COLOR PAPER OPTION November 2002 69 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Monochrome Long Click Color Paper gt Short Click Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection MICR Dual Pass Option This function allows the user to set the dual pass MICR option Press the Paper Feed Button for the MICR dual pass option you want SET MICR DUAL PASS OPTION YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click Enable Dual Pass gt Long Click Disable Dual Pass gt Short Click Save Parameters This function allows to save the selected hardware settings or return to the hardware options to select additional options Press the Paper Feed Button for the option you want Save new parameters YES gt Long Click NO MODIFY gt Short Click Default Code Page This function makes it possible to
163. ing two conditions occurs e LED blinks slow the paper is low There are approximately 1 1 2 to 7 1 2 meters 5 25 feet of paper remaining on the roll Change the paper as soon as possible to avoid running out part way through a transaction Depending on the application program the host computer may alert you when the paper is low e LED blinks fast the paper is out Change the paper immediately or data may be lost Caution Do not operate the printer or host computer if the printer runs out of paper The printer will not operate without paper but it may continue to accept data from the host computer Because the printer cannot print any transactions the data may be lost 40 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Removing the Paper Roll 1 Open the receipt cover 2 Remove the used roll Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer November 2002 41 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Loading the Paper Roll Note Tear off the end of the new roll so that the edge is loose 1 Place the new roll in the bin with a little extra paper extending over the front Be sure the paper unrolls from the bottom of the roll Otherwise the paper will not be printed on because the thermal coating will be on the wrong side 2 Close the receipt cover 3 Remove the excess paper by tearing it against the tear off blade 42 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using t
164. is command are used only by the command Select Receipt or Slip for Printing Slip for MICR Read 1B 63 30 n with n set to 04 Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H66 amp Chr m amp Chr n November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Generate Pulse to Open Cash Drawer ASCII ESC p n p1 p2 Hexadecimal 1B 70 n p1 p2 Decimal 27 112 n p1 p2 Value of n 0 48 Drawer 1 1 49 Drawer 2 Value of p1 0 255 Value of p2 0 255 Sends a pulse to open the cash drawer Formulas The value for either p1 or p2 is the hexadecimal number multiplied by 2 msec to equal the total time 1 On time p1 x 2 msec 2 Off time p2 x 2 msec Example MSComm41 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H70 amp Chr n amp Chr n Related Information The off time is the delay before the printer performs the next operation The recommend time for NCR cash drawers is 110 msec on time Refer to cash drawer specifications for required on and off times November 2002 101 7167 Owner s Manual 102 Chapter 6 Commands Select or Cancel Parallel Printing Mode on Receipt and Journal ASCII ESC zn Hexadecimal 1B7An Decimal 27 122n Because there is no journal station on the printer this command is not implemented and is ignored if received The command and its supporting operands will be discaraded Select Slip Station ASCII FS Hexadecimal 1C Decimal 28 Selects the Slip
165. is command is only valid for the receipt station This is only available in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode Select or Cancel White Black Reverse Print Mode ASCII GSBn Hexadecimal 1D 42n Decimal 2966n Value of i 0 Off Range of 5 1 On Only the lowest bit is used Default of n 0 255 0 Off November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Turns on White Black reverse printing mode This command is only available in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode In White Black reverse printing mode print dots and non print dots are reversed which means that white characters are formed by printing a black background When the White Black reverse printing mode is selected it is also applied to character spacing which is set by Right Side Character Spacing 1B 20 This command can be used with built in characters and user defined characters but does not affect the space between lines White Black Reverse Print Mode does not affect bit image downloaded bit image bar code HRI characters and spacing skipped by Horizontal Tab 09 Set Absolute Starting Position 1B 24 and Set Relative Print Position 1B 5C White Black reverse mode has a higher priority than Underline Mode When Underline Mode is on and White Black Reverse Print Mode is selected Underline Mode is disabled but not canceled Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H42 amp Chr n Exceptions This command is only v
166. is is the default parsing format if no other is selected Status Status Byte Value Good read data follows 0x00 Bad read data follows 0x01 No check present no data 0x02 Paper jam no data 0x03 No MICR characters no 0x04 data MICR Characters ASCII Hexadecimal Numerics 0 9 0x30 0x39 Unrecognized Character 0x3F Space 0x20 Amount symbol amp 0x26 Dash symbol 0x27 on us symbol 0x28 Transit symbol 0x29 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Once a parsing format is specified the following values are returned MICR Characters ASCII Hexadecimal Numerics 0 9 0x30 0x39 Space 0x20 Dash 0x2D Field separator Country code As specified in the parsing parameter string Check Serial Number Parsing the Check Serial Number Most banks print the check serial number in three easily recognizable spots The printer firmware will look for the number in these spots using the following ordered algorithm The examples use letters to represent symbols on the check t Transit symbol on us symbol Amount symbol Dash c Check serial number x Any other number A number bracketed by on us symbols in the auxiliary on us field is the check serial number OCCCCCCO tXxXXXXXXXXt XXXXXXXXO Otherwise a three or more digit number to the right of the rightmost on us symbol and to the left of the leftmost amount symbol if an amount field is present is the check serial numbe
167. it of n is 1 Function Performed Bit 0 or bit 1 Stop Receipt on Receipt Low Bit 4 Stop Slip if Trailing Edge Uncovered Bit 5 Stop Slip if Leading Edge Uncovered Default 0 Determines which sensor causes the printer to stop printing on the respective station The command does not affect the paper out sensor on the receipt station which will automatically stop the printer when the paper is depleted Example This statement causes the receipt to stop on paper low and the slip to stop if the leading edge s uncovered bits 0 and 5 equal to 1 yields hexadecimal 21 binary 00100001 MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H63 amp Chr amp H34 amp Chr amp H21 All other bits are ignored November 2002 97 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Enable or Disable Panel Buttons ASCII ESCc5n Hexadecimal 1B6335n Decimal 279953 n Value of n 0 Enable 1 Disable Default 0 Enable Enables or disables the Paper Feed Button If the last bit is 0 the Paper Feed Button is enabled If the last bit is 1 the Paper Feed Button is disabled so pressing the paper feed button will result in no response Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H63 amp Chr amp H35 amp Chr n Related Information Functions that require using the Paper Feed Button except for the Execute Macro 1D 5E command cannot be used when it is disabled with this command 98 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter
168. ive If paper is not low and no conditions indicate that the print head is too hot the power supply voltage is out of range Contact a service representative Slip or Forms Printing is Light Problem Ribbon cassette is worn 49 What to Do Replace the ribbon cassette Contact a service representative if this does not resolve the problem November 2002 Chapter 3 Solving Problems See Contacting a Service Representative later in this chapter See Environmental Conditions in Appendix A for the recommended temperature range for operating the printer See Contacting a Service Representative later in this chapter See Contacting a Service Representative later in this chapter Where to Go See Putting In and Changing the Ribbon Cassette in chapter 2 See Contacting a Service Representative later in this chapter 7167 Owner s Manual Receipt Printing is Light or Spotty Problem Thermal print head may be dirty What to Do Open the receipt cover and clean the thermal print head with cotton swabs and isopropyl alcohol Caution Do not use the alcohol to clean other parts of the printer Damage will occur Contact a service representative if this does not resolve the problem Chapter 3 Solving Problems Where to Go See Cleaning the Printer in chapter 2 See Contacting a Service Representative later in this chapter Note The thermal
169. ive mode 01 7156 mode 02 7150 mode 03 7167 Mode 206 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Hex 21 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 Function Default lines per inch Carriage return usage Asian mode Slip Print Width Option Receipt synchronization Print density Paper Low sensor option Paper width Knife option MICR option Check Flip option Max Power Color Paper Option Hex 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 02 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 00 01 Chapter 6 Commands Function 8 13 lines per inch 7 52 lines per inch 6 lines per inch Ignore CR Use CR as Print cmd Asian mode on Asian mode off 82 2 mm 7167 Mode 120 7 Conversion 7156 58 Mode Enabled Disabled 100 110 120 Paper low sensor enable Paper low sensor disable 80 mm 58 mm Enable knife Disable knife Enable MICR Disable MICR Enable check flip Disable check flip 55 W 75 W One color paper Two color paper November 2002 207 7167 Owner s Manual 208 m Function n Hex Hex 38 MICR dual pass option 00 01 40 Default Code page 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A OB 0C 0D 50 EEPROM default setting 00 Chapter 6 Commands Function Dual pass disable Dual pass enable 437 850 852 858 860 862 863 864 865 866 874 1252 Katakana 932 or 936 949 950 EEPROM default setting
170. k OF BS aS AE RS SE November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix C Code Page 949 Korean Cont DC40 DCFF DD40 DDFF DE4O DEFF DF40 DFFF 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 80 80 90 90 A0 BENMSEMOBUHM NEED 0 tin A Q SRL eR A CO a ee nn Cet teeta ete ee DO MEME MERA ea no RAKE ACES H I ICA Se X SE EO MEOW ALAC TAAL RAD ARER TS Eo eae a ate oe kt ge EEAS SEIS FO Se Re AH Ra REF AR HR FO apse A a BRA ABE ETA Ck S E040 EOFF E140 ElFF 40 40 50 50 60 60 70 70 90 A0 W PEPSUNUIAUSELZREEHIE AO WAR AR KRM BO TS BARS CRE BO RP RR a CO HAERE ERARE CO TRIE DR SE HERES ARORA DO MINBERA ESE DO BUEIMIORN Se Soe SAE ARK SEE EO A die Pe tL tenis me fC eae EON ARME FO SERRE Sa eRe FO SERIE RRA ene November 2002 261 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 949 Korean Cont E240 E2FF a SRE SA Ht 38 oR P o Te AE eL MEE 0 METEREN uk dtd 0 XR iri hip WENN E0 EMGAR aretet pet pido FO ptt iene eee ta E640 E6FF ERAN S AR ic DR RETO AN Tope HYRA GROAN DAA AAE R E EEM 182048 2 8 P WS tayka SEIUAE E340 ESFF uds Zu RUMMNOU SS ERR SS BARES AOS SIMA RA age EIE ag 0 oH SMA ABATED 0 m etre FRE TONA FO URAA ERRLTEME KE 1 E740 E7FF AO ISSR EE ee a Me BO 8 RREN AD SAk k ca i TE CO AGEREM IC REGISTRE DO SOLUIT SMS ERE EO WIR RHEHMIALIREDTRM FO WURDE RA 8 November 2002 Appendix C 262 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 949 Korean Cont E840 E8FF MAN RAMET AR E EUR D
171. k the Advanced tab Click the Uninstall button and follow the on screen instructions November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Using the Printer LED Paper Feed Button Note See Setting Switches earlier in this book for instructions on setting the DIP switches 1 Connect the power supply cable to the printer and turn on the power source The printer goes through a self test routine to ensure everything is working properly then beeps After the printer has completed its startup cycle it is ready to receive data If the LED blinks or the host computer indicates that there is a problem see Chapter 3 Solving Problems for more information 2 To perform a Configuration check optional reset the printer while holding the Paper Feed Button or open the receipt door and while pressing the paper feed button close the receipt door let go of the Paper Feed Button once the printing begins Note The printer receives power when the power supply is on even if the printer is off line To completely remove power unplug the power supply from the outlet or turn the POS terminal off November 2002 39 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Loading and Changing the Receipt Paper Although the illustrations show a used roll being removed the instructions apply to loading paper for the first time Change the paper when either of the follow
172. l pna EL EREET R ECOLE eas AT kasa Sa ii sn DEL dae DC40 DCFF RE ERRORIS SLA E AL ate COEUR ARECACEAE ES ROS POR RGB AEREI ST SLE SA C SRST a lana SACRE SESSA B9 Bx bn ERES ENDE GETESTET ELEC TRB AKA MARLE i 6 GB ORC LE 8 OR L Cati E ht BG MS a oD ORE A ae RET c a DR 0f BUSCO RUM BEINAHE DECRE BRE BRET BB DD40 DOFF JR ES ORE SD SH UR IARR Wi oe E s CURES t D 8 6 0 216 fad H EP 816 TESHURC IR RII RE SET UE TER Gi BA E Ef Fic UB UR TIERS HRE PRE BO n ABARAT BREA A BI DE40 DEFF as doe deh BER HACEN NONU CREER ACRES OE DE Ri RR UR a a WA ARIAS SURE we LEE CEP CECE EEE EE EE Enims I REE sie RMU TE S Sipas uyapis Basie RT DE T OUR Nt eee a DF40 DFFF TR SE a Oe BS PS SE 3862541 SL ABR A I EG RRS RE SATA EL St ik E PR BES Fe BE RR Bs A RES Me iphis PSE ASE AZ AG AP ie St oe ee Bs HHELPRES KE Ate T ikke ida ARA EROR ECA November 2002 Appendix C 274 7167 Owner s Manual Code Pare 950 Traditional Chinese Cont E040 EOFF 40 HUE AE E E ia al 90 SRE BOR wet Sh UNS 60 EEUU uma SE Sis 70 PREME AE CUM REQUE AQ SSE ACS BRS SS BB SERE BO PERAE AE SA SG SE SESH TR S SUI CO SG Shae SRS SES SSE SSE SS SIUS IW BE DO Sea CRUG E EO RIGA DET ECE SAT AAGU NATN Me SEER FO be an Att E140 E1FF QO Rt B DECRE RECURSO UIT SO BEUEUR NIA E a CREE HONOR E 60 EENAA EE SE San TS HR 70 Soak SE SX FS He a eT ee AO Fak Foe it LL a Fa ek WLS Em l Li 3 3 4 4 3335 Suk C
173. m 0 The macro executes r times continuously at the interval specified by t when the LSB Least significant bit of m 1 Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H5E amp Chr r amp Chr t amp Chr m Exceptions If this command is received while a macro is being defined the macro definition is aborted and the definition is cleared If the macro is not defined or if r is 0 nothing is executed This command is available in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode only 190 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands MICR Commands MICR Reading These commands control the Magnetic Ink Character Recognition MICR check reader including how it parses the character strings on checks The section MICR Parsing describes how to create a parsing format and how to create and maintain an Exceptions table Read MICR Data and Transmit ASCII ESC w1 Hexadecimal 1B 77 01 Decimal 271191 Default All data returned Reads and transmits the MICR data and adds a Carriage Return 0x0D If no parsing format is selected with either of the Define Parsing Format commands see below all data will be returned which is the default Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H77 amp Chr amp HO01 Reread MICR Data ASCII ESCwR Hexadecimal 1B 7752 Decimal 2711982 Resends the previously decoded MICR data to the host Example MSComm 1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr
174. m the User Data Storage Flash Page at the address specified Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H34 amp Chr amp H5 amp Chr amp HO amp Chr amp HO amp Chr amp H0 November 2002 201 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Read from Non Volatile Memory ASCII ESCjk Hexadecimal 1B6Ak Decimal 27 106k Range of k 20 63 decimal Reads a two byte word from location k in the history EEROM The printer returns the word at the next available opportunity Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H6A amp Chr k Write to Non Volatile Memory NVRAM ASCII ESCsnln2k Hexadecimal 1B73n1n2k Decimal 27115n1n2k Value of n1 1 Byte Value of n2 2nd Byte Range of k 20 63 decimal Writes the two byte word n1 n2 to location k in history EEROM Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H73 amp Chr n1 amp Chr amp Hn2k 202 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select Memory Type SRAM Flash Where to Save Logos or User Defined Fonts ASCII GS n Hexadecimal 1D22n Decimal 2934n Value of n 48 51 Specifies whether to load the logos or user defined characters to Flash Memory or to RAM volatile memory The selection remains in effect until it is changed via this command or until the power cycles n 48 ASCII n 0 Loads active logo to RAM only This is used to print a special logo but not have it tak
175. mand ASCII ESC wF Hexadecimal 1B 77 46 Decimal 27119 70 Causes a check on the slip table to be fed into the printer flipped and left with the trailing edge of the check in the slip feed rollers Prior to the flip the check is measured to see that it is of an appropriate size see Appendix B to be flipped If not the check is fed back to the user Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H77 amp Chr amp H46 Exception This command is available only in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode User Data Storage Commands Write to User Data Storage ASCII ESC m a0 al a2 d1 dm Hexadecimal 1B 27 m a0 a1 a2 d1 dm Decimal 2739 m a0 al a2 dl dm Value ofm 0 255 Writes m bytes of data to the User Data Storage Flash Page at the address specified The printer waits for m bytes of data following the 3 byte address addr If any of the memory locations addressed by this command are not currently erased the command is not executed Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H27 amp Chr amp H5 amp Chr amp H0 amp Chr amp H0 amp Chr amp HO amp Hello The above command writes the word Hello to the User Data Storage Flash Page 200 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Read from User Data Storage ASCII ESC 4m a0 al a2 Hexadecimal 1B 34 m a0 a1 a2 Decimal 2752 m a0 al a2 Value of m 0 255 Chapter 6 Commands Reads m bytes of data fro
176. mats ASCII hexadecimal and decimal Choose the format that best suits the programming implementation The printer interprets the 8 bit bytes it gets through its communication interface it does not care what format the program lists them in Name ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Operand n Range of n Default of n Description Formulas Example Exceptions Name of Command The ASCII representation of the command control code followed by its operands The hexadecimal representation of the command control code followed by its operands The decimal representation of the command control code followed by its operands A description of the command operand Other command operands may be m pl p2 x or y The upper and lower limits or list of possible values of the command operand The values are listed as decimal values unless specified otherwise The command operand default value after printer reset or startup A brief description of the use of the command Any formulas used for this command Coding example of how to send the command in Visual Basic This code assumes we are doing output to an opened and ready device called MSCOMM1 The examples use the hexadecimal command code formats the ASCII or decimal formats could also be used in VB In commands that use an operand a specific value is used and the result of using the selected value for the operand is described Describes any exceptions to
177. mp Chr n 106 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Feed n Dot Rows ASCII NAKn Hexadecimal 157 Decimal 217 Value of n Receipt Slip n 208 inch n 72 inch Range of 5 0 1277156 Emulation Mode 0 255 7158 Native Mode or 7167 Native Mode Feeds paper n dot rows without printing Receipt moves n rows if the print buffer is empty Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H15 amp Chr n Add n Extra Dot Rows ASCII SYNn Hexadecimal 167 Decimal 22n Value of n Receipt Slip n 208 inch n 72 inch Range ofn 0 12 Default Receipt Slip Adds n extra dot rows to the character height to increase space between print lines or decrease number of lines per inch Formulas The following table shows the relationship between the number of lines per inch and each extra dot row s added for both the receipt and slip stations November 2002 107 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Receipt Station Slip Station ExtraRows Lines Per DotRows ExtraRows LinesPer Dot Rows _ Inch Inch 0 8 47 24 0 10 29 7 1 8 13 25 1 9 00 8 2 7 81 26 2 8 00 9 3 7 52 27 3 7 20 10 4 7 25 28 4 6 55 11 5 7 00 29 5 6 00 12 6 6 77 30 6 5 54 13 7 6 55 31 7 5 14 14 8 6 35 32 8 4 80 15 9 6 16 33 9 4 50 16 10 5 98 34 10 4 24 17 11 5 81 35 11 4 00 18 12 564 3 2 3 79 19 Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H16 amp Chr n Print ASCII ETB Hexadecimal 17 Decimal 23 Prints one line from the buff
178. n 2 Disable the Print Head Gap Adjustment Test Mode 3 Exit the Configuration Menu The printer is in Normal Mode and can communicate with the host computer Save Parameters This function allows to save the selected diagnostics modes or return to the diagnostics mode to select additional options Press the Paper Feed Button for the option you want Save new parameters YES gt Long Click NO MODIFY gt Short Click Emulation Software Options Printer Emulations Printer emulations determine the commands that are available to the printer They are set by using the Configuration Menu See Configuring the Printer for instructions on how to enter the Configuration Menu The available options are 7158 Native Mode 7156 Mode 7150 Mode 7167 Mode Press the Paper Feed Button for the emulation you want SET EMULATION YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click 7158 Mode gt 1 Click 7156 Mode gt 2 Clicks 7150 Mode gt 3 Clicks 7167 Native Mode gt 4 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection November 2002 64 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics Printer ID Selections Printer ID Selections determines the print ID that is returned from the printer This is set by using the Configuration Menu See Configuring the Printer for instructions on how to enter the Configurati
179. n pitch n is specified to the movement downward nL nH x 256 n When pitch n is specified to the movement upward the negative direction use the complement of 65536 When pitch n is specified to the movement upward nL nH x 256 65536 N Exceptions This command is used only in Page Mode otherwise it is ignored Any setting that exceeds the specified printing area is ignored Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H5C amp Chr nL amp Chr nH 188 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Macro Commands These commands are used to select and perform a user defined sequence of printer operations Start or End Macro Definition ASCII GS Hexadecimal 1D3A Decimal 2958 Starts or ends macro definition Macro definition begins when this command is received during normal operation and ends when this command is received during macro definition The macro definition is cleared during definition of the macro when the Execute Macro 1D 5E command is received Normal printing occurs while the macro is defined When the power is turned on the macro is not defined The defined contents of the macro are not cleared by the Initialize Printer 1B 40 thus the Initialize Printer 1B 40 command may be used as part of the macro definition If the printer receives a second Select or Cancel Macro Definition 1D 3A command immediately after previously receiving a Select or Cancel Macro Defi
180. nce around printer 11 Code page 437 character set Code Page 437 225 Code page 850 character set Code Page 850 226 Code Page 852 228 Code Page 863 Code Page 865 l setting Commands bar code 175 check flip 200 flash download 213 graphics se cing AT page mode print 105 print characteristics 122 printer function 9I printer status real time real time rules for using 163 realtime moving data through the buffer 164 sending November 2002 Index 1 7167 Owner s Manual user data storage 200 vertical positioning 105 Commands printer function set horizontal and vertical minimum motion units 113 Commands real time alternate implementation first implementation real time request to printer GS seq uence 169 recognizing data from the Printer 162 Commands sending using BASIC using DOS 72 Communication Communication cables connecting sidere Communication interface See RS 232C interface Communication interface modes Configuring the printer 56 Connecting cables cash drawer 14 communication power Connector cash drawer 77 RS 232C communication 75 Consumables See Paper Contacting a service representative Data moving through buffer Datascope modes setting 61 Default code page 7o Default lines per inch setting eS Density of print 214 Diagnostic modes 60 Diagnostics knife failu
181. nding order A tab out of order terminates the command string as if it were 00 and remaining tab values are taken as normal data Formulas Set the tab positions in ascending order and put Hex 00 at the end Hex 1B 44 00 number of tabs not specified clears all tab positions Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H44 amp Chr amp H00 Exceptions The tabs cannot be set higher than the column width of the current pitch November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Set Relative Print Position ASCII ESC V n1 n2 Hexadecimal 1B5Cn1n2 Decimal 27 92 n1 n2 Value of n To Move the Relative Starting Position Right of the Current Position by n dots nl Remainder after dividing n by 256 n2 Integer after dividing n by 256 The values for n1 and n2 are two bytes in low byte high byte word orientation To Move the Relative Starting Position Left of the Current Position by n dots nl Remainder after dividing 65 536 n by 256 n2 Integer after dividing 65 536 n by 256 The values for n1 and n2 are two bytes in low byte high byte word orientation Moves the print starting position the specified number of dots either right up to the right margin or left up to the left margin of the current position The print starting position is reset to the first column after each line Formulas To move to the left Determine the value of n by multiplying the number of columns to move left of the
182. nes Inch and variable lines per inch November 2002 211 7167 Owner s Manual 212 Slew Speed Print Zone Noise Graphics Optional Other Thermal Receipt Station 6 7 Inches per Second 2 83 Inches Maximum 57 dBA Sound Pressure ISO 7779 User Defined Graphics Logo No Reverse Paper Feed Appendix A Specifications Slip Station 4 0 lines per Second 3 23 Inches Maximum 62 dBA Sound Pressure ISO 7779 User Defined Graphics Reverse Paper Feed Two Form in Sensors November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix A Specifications Thermal Receipt Station Impact Slip Station Paper Diameter 80 mm Max Not Applicable Paper Length 83 Meters 273 feet Side Insertion 2 0 Inches Min Front Insertion 2 75 Inches Min Paper Width 80 mm 1mm Side Insertion 8 0 Inches Min 3 15 Inches 02 Inches Front Insertion 2 0 Inches Min Paper Thickness Not Applicable 406 mm 016 Inch Printable Area 2 83 Inches Max 3 22 Inches Max Power Requirements The 7167 printer receives power from a separate power supply Here are the voltage requirements for the power supply Maximum Current Voltage Station Short Term Long Term 24 0 V 1076 Slip 4 6 Amps 3 15 Amps Receipt 6 5 Amps 3 15 Amps Environmental Conditions Operating Temperature 5 C to 45 C 40 F to 112 F models with knife 5 C to 50 C 40 F to 120 F models with no knife Operating Humidity 5 to 90 Condensation may occur when equipment is t
183. ng Commands Once the communication link is established commands can be sent to the printer This section describes how to send commands to the printer using DOS and BASIC This section does not take into account the necessary protocol but is meant as a general introduction to how the printer functions Using DOS to Send Commands One way of getting commands to the printer is to send them directly from DOS For example the command COPY CON COMI This sets the computer up such that the Hex code corresponding to any key that was pressed would be sent to the RS 232C communication port COM1 when the COPY mode is exited If the printer is connected to COMI then the data will go to the printer Exit the COPY mode by typing CTRL Z and then pressing the ENTER key This directs the data from any print command to the proper port commands can be sent from any software program November 2002 72 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 5 Communication Using BASIC to Send Commands In BASIC printer commands are sent as a string of characters preceded by the LPRINT command For example LPRINT CHRS amp HOA sends the hexadecimal number OA to the printer which causes the printer to print the contents of its print buffer Previously sent commands tell the printer exactly how this data should appear on the paper For example LPRINT CHR amp H12 ABC CHRS amp HOA sends the Hex numbers 12 41 42 43 0A to the printer This causes the prin
184. nition 1D 3A the printer remains in the macro undefined state Formulas The contents of the macro can be defined up to 2048 bytes Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H3A Exceptions If the macro definition exceeds 2048 bytes excess data is not stored This command is available in 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode only November 2002 189 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Execute Macro ASCII GS rtm Hexadecimal 1D5Ertm Decimal 2994rtm Value ofr The number of times to execute the macro Value of t The waiting time for executing the macro Value of m Macro executing mode 0 BitO The Macro executes r times continuously with waiting time specified by t 1 Bit0 The printer waits for feed button to be pressed after waiting for the period specified by t If the button is pressed the printer executes the macro once The printer repeats the operation r times Executes a macro After waiting for a specified period the LED indicators blink and the printer waits for the Paper Feed Button to be pressed After the button is pressed the printer executes the macro once The printer repeats this operation the number of specified times When the macro is executed by pressing the Paper Feed Button m 1 paper cannot be fed by using the Paper Feed Button Formulas The waiting time is t x 100 msec for every macro execution m specifies macro executing mode when the LSB Least significant bit
185. normal behavior of this command in 7158 Native Mode 7167 Native Mode as compared to the original 7156 The difference exists when the command is used to move to the left The 7156 processes the whole print string prior to putting it in the buffer for the print head This method of processing allows the 7156 to backup in the print string and replace characters and their associated attributes when a Set Relative Print Position command instructs the printer to move the print position to the left In order to improve the speed of printing the 7167 moves the data into a buffer for the print head when it receives it When the Set Relative Print Position command contains a move to the left this causes the new data to overstrike the previous data This behavior can be used to an application s advantage to provide the ability to create compound characters on the receipt station Select Justification ASCII ESCan Hexadecimal 1B61n Decimal 2797 n Value of n 0 48 Left Aligned 1 49 Center Aligned 2 50 Right Aligned Range of n 0 2 48 50 Default 0 Left aligned Specifies the alignment of the characters graphics logos and bar codes on the receipt station Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H61 amp Chr n Exceptions The command is valid only when input at the beginning of a line November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Set Left Margin ASCII GS Ln nH Hexadecimal
186. ns The command is enabled only when input at the beginning of a line The command is available only when the receipt is selected by Select Paper 1B 63 30 The command has no effect if Page Mode has previously been selected The Select Paper 1B 63 30 command can not be used in Page Mode In 7156 Emulation Mode 1B 4C is used for double density graphics November 2002 183 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select Standard Mode ASCII ESCS Hexadecimal 1B53 Decimal 27 83 Switches from Page Mode to Standard Mode In switching from Page Mode to Standard Mode data buffered in Page Mode is cleared the printing area set by Set Print Area in Page Mode 1B 57 is initialized and the print position is set to the beginning of the line This command switches the settings for the following commands the values for these commands can be set independently in Standard Mode and Page Mode to those for Standard Mode 1 Set Right Side Character Spacing 1B 20 2 Select 1 6 Inch Line Spacing 1B 32 3 Set Line Spacing 1B 33 Standard Mode is automatically selected when power is turned on the printer is reset or the Initialize Printer command 1B 40 is used Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H53 Exceptions This command is effective only in Page Mode 184 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select Print Direction in Page Mode ASCII ESCTn Hexadecimal 1B54n De
187. nsor Not Covered Covered 7 Thermal Head Temp or Voltage Ok Out of Range Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H76 Related Information See Real Time Commands in this document for details about fault condition reporting November 2002 153 7167 Owner s Manual Transmit Printer ID ASCII Hexadecimal Value of n Transmits the printer ID specified by n as follows Decimal GSIn 1D 49 7 2973n 1 49 Printer model ID 2 50 Type ID 3 51 ROM version ID 4 52 Logo definition Chapter 6 Commands N Printer ID Specification ID hexadecimal 1 49 Printer model ID NCR 7167 0xA1 7167 Native Mode 1 49 Printer model ID NCR 7158 0x28 7158 Native Mode 1 49 Printer model ID NCR 7156 0x26 7156 Emulation 1 49 Printer model ID NCR 7150 0x02 7150 Mode 2 50 Type ID Installed options Refer to the table below 3 51 ROM version ID ROM version 0x00 4 52 Logo Definition Logo Definition Refer to table below Type ID n 2 154 Bit OfflOn Hex Decimal Function 0 Off 00 0 No two byte character code installed On 01 1 Two byte character code installed 1 Off 00 0 No knife installed On 02 2 Knife installed Undefined 3 Off 00 0 No MICR installed On 08 8 MICR installed 4 Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to Off 5 Undefined 6 Undefined 7 Off 00 0 Not used Fixed to Off
188. nterface Settings If the user sets the printer to use an RS 232C serial interface the Configuration Menu can be used to set the following RS 232C specific settings Set the baud rate to 115200 57600 38400 19200 9600 4800 2400 or 1200 baud Set the number of data bits to seven or eight Set the number of stop bits to one or two Enable or disable parity Set flow control to software XON XOFF or Hardware DTR DSR Set the printer to ignore data errors or print a upon encountering an error The settings used will depend on the software the operator is using and the capabilities of the host computer Press the paper feed button for the communications settings you want Defaults are marked with asterisks SET INTERFACE TYPE YES Long Click NO Short Click RS232 USB 1 Click RS232 2 Clicks USB 3 Clicks Enter code then hold Button Down At least 1 second to validate SET BAUD RATE YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click 115200 Baud gt 1 Click 57600 Baud 2 Clicks 38400 Baud gt 3 Clicks 19200 Baud gt 4 Clicks November 2002 58 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics More 5 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate 9600 Baud gt 1 Clicks 4800 Baud gt 2 Clicks 2400 Baud 3 Clicks 1200 Baud gt 4 clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate SET NUMBER OF DATA BITS YES gt Long Cl
189. o Definition 189 1D 40 n Erase User Flash Sector 205 1D 42n Select or Cancel White Black Reverse Print 138 Mode 1D 48 n Select Printing Position for HRI Characters 175 1D 49 n Transmit Printer ID 153 1D 49 40 n Transmit Printer ID Remote Diagnostics 155 Extension 1D 4C nL nH Set Left Margin 119 1D 50 x y Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion 113 Units 1D 56 m Select Cut Mode and Cut Paper 102 1D56mn Select Cut Mode and Cut Paper 102 1D 57 nL nH Set Printing Area Width 120 1D 5C nL nH Set Relative Vertical Print Position in Page 188 Mode 1D5Ertm Execute Macro 190 1D61n Select or Cancel Automatic Status Back 171 1D 66 n Select Pitch for HRI Characters 176 1D 68 n Select Bar Code Height 176 1D 6B m dl Print Bar Code 177 1D 6B mn dl1 dn Print Bar Code 177 1D 72n Transmit Status 156 1D77n Select Bar Code Width 180 1D FF Reboot Printer 218 1E Select Receipt Station 104 November 2002 TT 7167 Owner s Manual 78 Chapter 6 Commands Hexadecimal Command Page Code and Operands Command Name 1F04n Convert 6 Dots mm Bitmap to 8 Dots mm 150 Bitmap 1F05n Select Superscript or Subscript Modes 139 IF 11 m n m n m Printer Setting Change 206 n OFFH 1F 56 Send Printer Software Version 161 1F 74 Print Test Form 104 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Printer Function Commands Hexadecimal C
190. o HT fn PSA ye Er FB E IA RA aT Se AA40 AAFF FLUR ARO LST SE A AI atest sa s saa EEE E ERE sas sis POETE TSTTE RRS Me Wyse i ah HR IAEE ESD eA AoE LE XN Fira Ps att T B ms Hip ads SEXE BREAST AB40 ABFF RENEI DUM D i E Ge DE RRB OR fen RRE FREU ELO RAE Y 0 38 E W LF AUR BTR LR BSS NT S BARR AR Ree aA tu isig RRO ANSE ER a Be OL SR tB HE YFRRASREG BM CHEESE FRIG aise dh ent ot ap imi ES FA ES AC40 ACFF PREG ISPS EAE ARR ER Re Ruine Ek kE 35 3E RSA IPP s Fe E I S REN Se iS Rais Ris SU RUE l x E HASERREA A n Ee S EO DOOR TUN ARDT Ze EAE eh ALACAD AZ AT LF E AD40 ADFF IAS MeN ER RURE prd ERA B ES I ta 25 s WI s 6 8 f P IEE ELA ee oat eae Oe AE Fale lh SE TRO n Fa SO p SE Ee B CREE AE40 AEFF ss s ed re e A Hk Oe eB FT PARE SRE eS BAR MRE ioe Ee AEE DEA ENTERT RIRE RRE rg RARER ERA E RRE ARRE RNE EIS HT AD RES K RS ROR TE AF40 AFFF WIP WARE KEE B W a CAE cad PRR IE MS RIALS DEAE Ea Rr tiki 2 eS Pa eee REE ON EST Aa SE ERR OR pr ERR ITE FXERTH REL 7S TE V E RUE SECRUE CAR KS AOT E RASS sr no ANE BE DiS SATA EDU Tr Hwee TEE T ADR ORE November 2002 Appendix C 268 7167 Owner s Manual Code Pare 980 Traditional Chinese Cont B040 BOFF BRS S BE EUER IET 3552 BERE AARE pe eg ne PETI RERO GG ie it S ce HE DUREE i a Pa LS 49 aaa Rote E SEE CFD xc aE
191. o be inserted When the slip station has already been selected and the selection is changed the form feed roller is opened If the station has already been selected and it is re selected no action takes place Example This statement selects the receipt for printing MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H63 amp Chr amp H30 amp Chr amp H01 Exceptions Receiving the command discards unprinted data in the buffer forcing a beginning of line state When 7 is out of range this command and it s supporting operands are discarded November 2002 95 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select Receipt or Slip for Setting Line Spacing ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Value of n Default of n ESCc1n 1B6331n 27 9949 n 0 Journal selected 1 2 3 Select receipt 4 Select Slip 1 Selects which station receives the effects of the following commands 1 Select Default Line Spacing 1B 32 2 SetLine Spacing 1B 33 3 Addn extra dot rows 16 n Example This statement selects the slip station for line spacing commands MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H63 amp Chr amp H31 amp Chr amp H04 Exceptions This n is out of range this command it s supporting operands are discaraded 96 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select Sensors to Stop Printing ASCII ESCc4n Hexadecimal 1B 63 34n Decimal 279952n Value of n If this b
192. o start the Edgeport utility Serial Port Configuration Methods Automatic Default When the printer is plugged into the USB port of the host and the drivers are loaded the printer will default to the next available serial port number In many cases this is exactly what is desired You can check the assigned serial port by clicking the General tab in the Edgeport utility You ll see an entry for the NCR printer Expand the list to see which serial port has been assigned to the printer Assigning a serial port to the printer If the default assignment does not meet the requirements of the installation you can assign a different serial port to the printer From the General tab of the Edgeport utility select the printer and press Configure Follow the directions on the resulting form to assign a new port to the printer Associating a serial port with a specific USB port Windows 98 and NT In certain installations it is desirable to associate a serial port number with a specific USB port This is particularly important if multiple identical printers are installed on one host Select the Advanced tab in the Edgeport utility and follow the instructions for configuring the serial port number based on the physical USB port Uninstalling the Drivers Windows 98 1 Open the Device Manager and make sure View Devices By Type is selected 2 Scroll down to Universal serial bus controller and expand the list by pressing the symbol You ll se
193. ode Page 437 850 852 and 858 Code Page 850 Code Page 437 234567839ABCDEF 2 3 d 940 7979 A B Dit F i dat amp Ot o oroooo TO n gt gt O Q uwa HH BE B m ad FO i r i be j r Di S dEB lt lt TOs eT gt c D ODF ON 99 Do Nee v X LI a COO O SOD amp QUA x CO 3 4D 40 40 40 40 OD Q D lt Q CO C Ordre x gt q xq G O O G MF TC g C oO A G QC cz gt 3m gt lt gt ri lt Ga x n CO C3 iri LL 2 T iH 2 gt x IE O mo B CO C4 CO SE IO OG F 00 OC o Von A CV WARD x EN CO CN CO lt r lO tO f 00 lt cO O Ca dl OOOOOOOoOOoOOOOoO0000 HE H AL VI d Ju 0 gt N B SCCL FW O Ir ee CS 8 e QC i E iL e Pop J e SE F SS Wee O CZ 0 DL TA x A Wee OO X 037 gt C4 OW C 23 OOO 40 40 OOD xD Oe lt QTL rx 75 gt X gt N es a D Q O O D DC my CO Aa O C 0 lI 9 gt gt Ae lt Ba lt a CO C Lii LL ODA Is _ I gt ZO CO c4 CON CO SY IO wm QD CD ee V H A Code Page 858 Code Page 852 23490607E IABCODEF 305 607 e 9A Bob DE F 1 Do ooN M C CD D O O Aan gt gt D CO 4ldd11 Au Op H NN B He A b ia eS S je H F n Dif ET Ce r Or O Daze O O r wwe V A WB OO O
194. ode page 932 8A 84885 AB k FR eS de TT AE RELAI cA Abd BUE Cae eek HE MBOWE LIE ee ae PATA TE ie ee SRA IS Se HE TEMOR EIS T8 12 sa 8 E 48 NEHE Hab ea ED SS RORIS ere arr HER ETERIK Cee L LI ED BT ARs BR POSSE A HBO DR AR RE SR YUS PE pier aera E BA BORSA Code page 932 8C 1g E gi VL ETE RED S SE 4938 SOEUR RR URNAM E E RB MBIBINELRHEX HAE S Bs iSIS sede E Code page 332 8E SEIS RALAS RE ME AA OLOR R RA sip HE W M ARM R SLE CLR BRI DU HI xr Ber Bh as Fe E lt IUS LE FR TB 4 k Ae E We ES BE 2E AR Es ES an ES ORMIER EIL S Fs tosses DOER EE oR TE 8 2379 BET EE F E SUCRE TOR W E DE REN PERHE E ees ere nnt Code page 932 88 40 50 60 70 80 PBB 0 S Sa AT SE RERCUR UL RD aso AM EX SATE R SIS Code page 932 8 40 3 0 M f erue FL TIS SL B R TOM FS EAST UR GE Pu SM HEIRS BORA Misa Ree ETE IU RU Code page 932 8F ZREULN ERIS ON FS ELA BR At ASR y SEE PINAR EET ERR TEER E E CRUS Tes u Na DRE BRA EH 5 uh 8t 18938 8034 22 59 5 REO R8 HERR UXORIS IR AAT RT E RET PERE EDGR Sc Dp RAC ROB A CFE Ft 2 OS PO R DE al B 38 v IUE November 2002 Appendix C 232 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 932 Cont Code page 932 90 40 EA RIAM 90 REE DR HR S RAR vse RI JN 60 SRE Sar eee BS ot REAL 70 ISEREUGLISS RE 80 EE BE RDF ZK Ras EI CER SERE TR 90 IMBRE BUDBNERTURE SR US A0 JH TH RA eA BS Ee RE BO Raa ARIE Sit E RETE Be a EE CO WAR ar AAA FA Se eS a C DO
195. of n 0 Code Page 437 1 User defined RAM character set 2 Code Page 850 Range 0 2 Default 0 Code Page 437 Selects the character set When an undefined RAM character is selected the Code Page 437 character is used See the Printing Specification Guide for the character sets Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H25 amp Chr n November 2002 127 7167 Owner s Manual Define User Defined Characters Receipt Chapter 6 Commands Slip ASCII ESC amp 3cl1c2n1 d1 nndn ESC amp 0 c1 c2 d1 dn Hexadecimal 1B 263 c1 c2 n1 d1 nn dn 1B 26 0 c1 c2 d1 dn Decimal 27383 c1 c2 n1 d1 nn dn 27 38 0 c1 c2 d1 dn Defines and enters downloaded characters into RAM or Flash The command may be used to overwrite single characters User defined characters are available until power is turned off or the Initialize Printer command 1B 40 is received Any invalid byte s c1 c2 n1 aborts the command User defined character sets for both slip and receipt may be used at the same time The command clears bit image logo data from RAM The illustration below provides a sample of a character cell Defining User Defined Characters for the Slip and Receipt Station Defines and enters downloaded characters into RAM Receipt Characters 1B 26 3 Top of Character 128 Slip Characters 1B 26 0 Top of Character MSB d dn d1 d4 10 af LSB Most Significant Bit Is Not Printed Nov
196. oh baits E ng CREAM AMS SAM Tia BR Bis MER E HE EI Fe OUR November 2002 Appendix C 235 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 932 Cont Code page 932 E2 40 REST AA as CTE TA 50 RARE BR BO PERRITA BEE xS RAS PA TIT 70 EG RS S eS Se 80 BRR AR REIS Ut Tua ean a ae 90 WARANA S E x L x a cde Code page 932 E4 40 Aa Be AF Bi RIT AE RR RE ASS BAR Bi AA 50 Fes Aiea SS E Ase DR R DER De Rb 55 AI Y h A dt fp 70 a LE i Ag ur 843 ai ABE Sp ttal DUE SD e Dit aa o 388 St oet at SE it St See E SE os Wig et ost mt EID RC 3e c ER Bat Sct E 88 j m xt E BR a n DAENS M 8 3 3 aa ONERE a ER Re LE EE 0 t9 Code page 932 E6 40 HH UR AERE ER oj RR RR SO WAME NE A DERG DHAL K AE RIAA ABE EE 60 STAVES EAS SA RHRAAS S MADE BH na a E 70 Dea Dh adt a ARE MERE a nee a Se SH ME HEHE Pte ere BE 90 RENUENS ETE ER M PN GR SR AO MIBGERETR GR CUR NUR D GS OE BO UM NO Teta GG CO SERIEI RADEN AGO W BOS SE SEN DO AASE SE Be GALA DERE REUS EO lez aMe aL Pk RM EMDR PED REPE OR FO PIRES SR IE BAe EROS PR PA ERED Code page 932 E3 40 ee ae A 50 BRAGA AE REIR AR OS 48 FEA ERS BO ABADIA IRAE KLAR EA RID ROLES 70 WRASSE AGS AE A A A I A A A RA 80 ARASH AM ANA AR RE a AAR A A SOR A Aa ANN aE AS AAR A CELA TR AQ BSR iS i OO 5 E PS Be E TL GR B0 RRA HBRRRRAME CO Ru 5 57105 Be I Oa BRE RH DO EO BRS Fae WOR Se IREN AT Er AL AA a FO pipet is
197. olumn as the absolute starting position 28 x 10 280 dots beginning of column 29 280 256 1 remainder of 24 nl 24 n2 1 Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H24 amp Chr n1 amp Chr n2 Related Information This command is also used in the graphics mode on the receipt See Graphics Commands in this chapter for more information If the Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units command 1D 50 is used to change the horizontal and vertical minimum motion unit the parameters of this command Set Absolute Print Position will be interpreted accordingly For more information see the description of the Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units command 1D 50 in this document November 2002 115 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Set Horizontal Tabs 116 ASCII ESC D n k NUL Hexadecimal 1B 44 n k 00 Decimal 27 68 n k0 Value ofn Column for tab minus one n is always less than or equal to the current selected column width Value of k 0 32 Default Every 8 characters from column 1 9 17 25 etc for normal print Sets up to 32 horizontal tab positions n columns from column one but does not move the print position See the Horizontal Tab 09 command The tab positions remain unchanged if the character widths are changed after the tabs are set This command ends with hexadecimal 00 hexadecimal 1B 44 00 clears all tabs Tabs assumed to be in strictly asce
198. ommand Code and Operands Command Name Page 10 Clear Printer 90 11 Close Form 91 18 Open Form 91 19 Perform Full Knife Cut 92 1A Perform Partial Knife Cut 92 1B07 Generate Tone 93 1B3C Return Home 93 1B3D Select Peripheral Device for Multi Drop 93 1B 40 Initialize Printer 94 1B43n Set Slip Paper Eject Length 94 1B6330n Select Receipt or Slip for Printing Slip for MICR 94 Read 1B6331n Select Receipt or Slip for Setting Line Spacing 96 1B6334n Select Sensors to Stop Printing 97 1B6335n Enable or Disable Panel Buttons 98 1B6337n Enable or Disable Slip Paper End Feeding Stop 99 1B66mn Set Slip Paper Waiting Time 100 1B 69 Perform Full Knife Cut 92 1B6D Perform Partial Knife Cut 92 1B 70 n p1 p2 Generate Pulse to Open Cash Drawer 101 1B7An Select or Cancel Parallel Printing Mode on R amp J 102 1C Select Slip Station 102 1D56m Select Cut Mode and Cut Paper 102 1D56mn Select Cut Mode and Cut Paper 102 1E Select Receipt Station 104 1F74 Print Test Form 104 November 2002 79 7167 Owner s Manual Vertical Positioning and Print Chapter 6 Commands Hexadecimal Command Horizontal Positioning Commands 80 Code and Operands Command Name Page 0A Print and Feed Paper One Line 105 0C Print and Return to Standard Mode Print and 105 Eject Slip 0D Print and Carriage Return 106 14n Feed n Print Lines 106 15n Feed n Dot Rows 107 16n A
199. ommand is a batch mode command that is it is processed after all prior data in the receive buffer has been processed There may be a time lag between the printer receiving this command and changing the ASB response depending on the receive buffer status If any of the status items listed are selected ASB is enabled and the printer automatically transmits 4 status bytes whenever the selected status changes If no status is selected ASB is disabled All four status bytes are transmitted without checking DSR If the error status is enabled a change in the following conditions will trigger the ASB Out of Range Print head Temperature Decimal Status for ASB Cash drawer status disabled Cash drawer status enabled RS 232C Busy status disabled RS 232C Busy status enabled Error status disabled Error status enabled Receipt paper roll status disabled Receipt paper roll status enabled Undefined Slip detector slip paper status disabled 1 Cash Drawer 2 Receipt Cover 3 Knife Error 4 5 Out of Range Voltage 6 Paper Exhaust Status 7 Slip Paper The bits of n are defined in the table Bit Offfon Hex 0 Off 00 0 On 01 1 1 Off 00 0 On 02 2 2 Off 00 0 On 04 4 3 Off 00 0 On 08 8 5 Off 00 0 On 20 32 Slip detector slip paper status enabled Undefined Undefined November 2002 171 7167 Owner s Manual 172 Chapter 6 Commands Default 0 ASB disabled Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp C
200. on This command is ignored in 7156 Emulation Mode and is only valid on the receipt station November 2002 125 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select Print Modes ASCII ESC n Hexadecimal 1B21n Decimal 2733n Value of n Pitch selection standard compressed double high or double wide Bit Function 0 1 Bit0 Pitch Standard Pitch Compressed Pitch 15 6 CPI Receipt 20 3 CPI Receipt 44 Col Line 80 mm 56 Col Line 80 mm 32 Col Line 58 mm 42 Col Line 58 mm 13 9 CPI Slip 17 1 CPI Slip 45 Col Line 55 Col Line Bit3 Emphasized Canceled Set Mode Bit4 Double Canceled Set high Bit5 Double wide Canceled Set Bit7 Underlined Canceled Set Mode Bits 1 2 6 are not used IStandard and compressed pitch cannot be used together in the same line Double high characters cannot be used with normal characters in the same line nor can they be used on the slip station Default 0 for bits 0 3 4 5 7 Selects the print mode standard compressed double high or double wide Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H21 amp Chr n Related Information 126 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands The bits in this command perform the same function as the standalone functions 1B16n Select Pitch 1B45n Emphasized 12 Double wide 13 Single wide 1B2Dn Underline Select or Cancel User Defined Character Set ASCII ESC n Hexadecimal 1B 25n Decimal 2737n Value
201. on The following two illustrations show the dot patterns of sample characters for standard pitch 15 6 CPI and compressed pitch 20 3 CPI Note that compressed pitch uses fewer dots horizontally than standard pitch Standard Pitch B Upper Case With Ascender m Lower Case Both Ascender and Desender g With Descender Graphic Symbol 203 DPI 15 6 CPI Pitch Standard November 2002 217 7167 Owner s Manual Slip Station Appendix B Print Characteristics Compressed Pitch P 24 Dots 3 00 mm 118 in 4 EN B Upper Case With Ascender m Lower Case Both Ascender and Decsender g With Descender Graphic Symbol 203 DPI 19 CPI Pitch Compressed The following illustrations show the dot patterns of sample characters for standard pitch 13 9 CPI double wide characters and rotated characters counterclockwise Standard Pitch The first illustration shows a single character with the dimensions listed in the table that follows including dimensions for compressed pitch The second illustration shows the layout of columns for standard pitch characters agl Next Character E Row spacing is fixed and column spacing depends upon the character pitch as indicated in the table Standard Pitch Compressed Pitch Dimension 13 9 CPI 45 Columns 17 1 CPI 55 Columns A 366 mm 0144 inches 30 mm
202. on Menu The available options are 7158 Native ID Emulated Print ID 7167 Native ID Press the Paper Feed Button for the emulation you want SET PRINTER ID MODE YES Long Click NO Short Click 7158 Mode ID 1 Click Emulated Printer ID 2 Clicks 7167 Native ID 3 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Default Lines Per Inch This function allows the user to set the default lines per inch printed by the thermal printer to 6 7 52 or 8 13 See Configuring the Printer for instructions on how to enter the Configuration Menu to change this setting Press the Paper Feed Button for the lines per inch you want SET DEFAULT LINES PER INCH YES Long Click NO Short Click 8 13 Lines per Inch gt 1 Click 7 52 Lines per Inch gt 2 Clicks 6 Lines per Inch gt 3 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate Note Press the Paper Feed Button for at least one second to validate the selection Carriage Return Usage This function allows the printer to ignore or use the Carriage Return hexadecimal 0D command depending on the application Some applicatons expect the command to be ignored while others use the command as a print command See Configuring the Printer for instructions on how to enter the Configuration Menu to change this setting Press t
203. op bits and data bits are ignored To define software or hardware handshaking 1 Open the Receipt Cover and check whether there is paper in the printer If there isn t insert the paper roll as described in the Owner s Manual 2 Turn the printer so the back is facing you 3 Set DIP switch 1 to the On position up November 2002 19 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer DIP Switch Switch 2 is shown in the OFF position 4 Reset the printer The printer beeps prints the current configuration then waits for you to make a selection from the Main Menu on the printout 20 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Diagnostics Form Model number Serial number Boot Firmware Revision CRC Flash Firmware Revision CRC Hardware Flash Memory Size Flash Logos Size Flash Fonts Size Flash User Storage Communication Interface Interface Type Parameters Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Flow Control Reception Errors Receive Buffer Diagnostic Mode Emulation Software Printer Emulation Printer ID Mode Default LPI To enter Diagnostics Mode Flip DIP switch 1 on Reset the printer by pressing and holding the Receipt Feed switch down while disconnecting and reconnecting the power 7167 A991703053 V0 17 C525 V03 12 OEFF 2Mbytes 256Kbytes 64Kbytes 64Kbytes RS232 USB 9600 8 1 None DTR DSR Print Off Normal Mode 7158 Native Mode 7167
204. op to the forms stop position If the printer is reset or the Clear command 0x10 is received the feed roller and platen are opened This command executes if the platen is already closed This command is processed regardless of which station is selected Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H11 Open Form ASCII CAN Hexadecimal 18 Decimal 24 When the printer is in 7156 Emulation Mode or in non Page Mode this command opens the feed roller and platen so that a form may be inserted default position This command has the same code as the Cancel Print Data in Page Mode command which is only executed in Page Mode This command executes if the platen is already open This command executes opens the feed roller and platen regardless of which station is selected Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H18 November 2002 91 7167 Owner s Manual 92 Chapter 6 Commands Perform Partial Knife Cut ASCI EM or ESC i Hexadecimal 19 or 1B 69 Decimal 25 or 27 105 Cuts the receipt leaving 20 inch 5 mm of paper This command is implemented the same as Partial Knife Cut 1A 1B 6D There are two codes for this command Both codes perform the same function A Line Feed is executed first if the print buffer is not empty This command is executed cuts the receipt regardless of which station is selected Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H19 or MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H69 Perform Part
205. ore looking in the normal check serial number locations In this example without an exception table entry the firmware would always pick the rightmost four digit number as the check serial number following rule two above The bank with the three digit check serial number and the four digit extension after the on us symbol would need to be exceptionally recognized UXXXXXXXXXt CCC XXXXXXXXXXOXXXX UCXXXXXXXXXt XXX XXXXXXXXXXOCCCC In this example without an exception table entry the firmware would not be able to pick out the check serial number because it is not separated from the rest of the account number CXXXXXXXXXt CCCCXXXXXXXXXXO In this example without an exception table entry the firmware would not be able to pick out the check serial number correctly because it is imbedded within the rest of the account number UXXXXXXXXXU XXX CCC XXXXXXXXXXO Loading the Exception Table The exception table begins at word 20 in NVRAM Each entry takes five words There is room for eight exceptions with a sumcheck written in the last word An application can load local exceptions into the printer using the write NVRAM command Ox1B 0x73 n1 n2 k which writes the two byte word n1 n2 to word k in NVRAM Exception Table Entry Format Each exception table entry consists of five words The first two words contain the first eight characters of the transit number by packing the low order nibble of the numeric transit number characters Fo
206. ors is checked and the status bytes are updated If the printer has not been turned on before the default values for the printer functions will be loaded into the non volatile memory during level 0 These values can be changed in level 1 diagnostics See Level 1 Diagnostics for the functions and their settings When the last step is complete the Paper Feed button is enabled and the printer is ready for normal operation Information about the tests is available to the communication interface through the commands November 2002 53 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics Level 1 Diagnostics Level 1 diagnostics setup mode allow you to change the settings for various printer functions and run certain tests Keep the following information in mind when changing the settings The settings can only be changed when the printer is in level 1 diagnostics setup mode Switch 1 must be set to On and Switch 2 must be set to Off The default options are set at the factory and are stored in the history non volatile memory Once the settings have been changed and stored in the non volatile memory the diagnostic setup is exited which saves the settings Caution If you are changing the printer settings be sure they are the correct settings for that particular function or test to avoid accidentally changing the settings for another function or test If the settings are accidentally changed you must reenter the setup mode and reenter the co
207. ost computer The printer begins printing Remove the form or check after it has been fed back out Follow the instructions from the host computer to finish the transaction November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer 19 PAY TO THE ere ed DOLLARS ele MEMO CE M 1031203531501 100 DB2571 7 S Check Orientation November 2002 47 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Validating and Verifying Checks Note If the MICR check reader feature is present checks are verified then validated 1 Insert the check from the front and place it on the slip table face down as shown in the illustration on the facing page Slide the check to the right until it lines up against the guide wall Slide the check toward the back of the printer until it contacts the form stop it won t be able to go any further Or align the check with any preset mark you may have made on the slip table The green LED on the slip table turns on when the form or check is properly inserted it has to cover two sensors on the slip table Follow the instructions from the host computer If the MICR check reader feature is present the check is fed in and out while the check numbers are read If the check is verified as good it is then validated If the check is not verified as good it is not validated Note Do not hold or keep the check from moving during the MICR ch
208. ot be encoded the printer prints the bar code data processed so far and the following data is treated as normal data November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual m Bar Code 65 UPC A 66 UPC E 67 JAN13 EAN13 68 JANS8 EANS 69 CODE39 70 Interleaved 2 of 5 ITF 71 CODABAR NW 7 72 Code 93 73 Code 128 75 PDF417 Example D 48 57 ASCII numerals 48 57 48 57 48 57 48 57 65 90 ASCII alphabet 32 36 37 43 45 46 47 ASCII special characters d1 dn 42 start stop code is supplied by printer if necessary 48 57 65 68 start code 48 57 36 43 45 46 47 58 0 127 0 105 d1 103 105 must be a Start code d2 0 102 data bytes Stop code is provided by the printer 0 255 Chapter 6 Commands n Length Fixed Length 11 12 Fixed Length 11 12 Fixed Length 12 13 Fixed Length 7 8 Variable Variable Even Number Variable Variable 7158 Native Mode and 7167 Native Mode only Variable Variable Length 7158 Native Mode only and 7167 Native Mode MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H6B amp Chr m amp 123456789012 amp Chr 0 The above command will print the number above or below the bar code depending on which parameter for m that specify Exceptions Illegal data cancels this command The command is valid only at the beginning of a line PDF 417 format cannot be printed on the slip Barcodes on the Slip are always
209. ovember 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Select 90 Degree Counter Clockwise Rotated Print ASCII ESC DC2 Hexadecimal 1B12 Decimal 2718 Rotates characters 90 degrees counter clockwise The command remains in effect until the printer is reset or until a Clear Printer 0x10 Select or Cancel Upside Down Print 1B 7B or Select or Cancel Rotated Print 1B 56 command is received Example MSComm41 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H12 Exceptions This command is valid only at the beginning of a line Rotated print and non rotated print characters cannot be used together in the same line Related Information See Summary of Rotated Printing in this chapter Select Pitch Column Width ASCII ESC SYN n Hexadecimal 1B16n Decimal 2722n Value of n 0 Standard Pitch 1 Compressed Pitch Default 0 Standard pitch Selects the character pitch for a print line Formulas The following table provides the print characteristics for both pitches on the receipt and slip stations November 2002 123 7167 Owner s Manual 124 Receipt Pitch Columns Standard 44 for 80 mm paper 32 for 58 mm paper Compressed 56 for 80 mm paper 42 for 58 mm paper Example Receipt CPI 15 6 20 3 Slip Columns 45 55 MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H16 amp Chr n Related Information Chapter 6 Commands Slip CPI 13 9 17 1 See Technical Specifications for
210. pack Ribbon cassette Thermal receipt paper roll Cardboard restraint for carriage behind front cover These items may be ordered as options from NCR and will be shipped separately Communication cable from host computer to printer DC Power Cable Remote Power Supply USB plus Power Cables Cash drawer cables may be ordered from other equipment suppliers see Ordering Other Supplies in chapter 1 November 2002 9 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Removing the Packing Material 1 Remove the printer from the foam pack and plastic bag 2 Open the front cover and remove the carriage holder 3 Remove the head gap holder from the slip table 10 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer 4 Remove the ribbon cassette receipt paper roll and cables from the foam packing material 5 Save all packing materials for future storing moving or shipping the printer Caution Remove the carriage holder and the head gap holder before using the printer Do not pickup the printer using the slip table as a handle Re Packing the Printer Review the illustrations on the previous pages to pack the printer 1 Place receipt paper between the receipt cover and the print head for protection 2 Remove the ribbon cassette move the carriage to the corner and place the cardboard restraint in the slip carriage area 3 Place the cardboard support on the slip tabl
211. phics data November 2002 163 7167 Owner s Manual 164 Chapter 6 Commands In this case the sequence will also be handled correctly as the graphics data it is intended to be when the graphics command is executed from the buffer Third care must be taken not to insert a Real Time command into the data sequence of another command that consists of two or more bytes In this case the printer will use the real time command sequence bytes instead of the other command s parameter bytes when finally executing that other command from the buffer the other command will NOT be executed correctly These three situations generally preclude use of standard DOS drivers for the serial communication ports when using real time commands Moving Data Through the Buffer Another consideration is that an application should take care not to let the buffer fill up with real time commands when the printer is busy at the RS 232C interface A busy condition at the RS 232C interface can be determined by bit 3 of the response to 1D 05 or 1D 04 1 or 10 04 1 The reason for a particular busy condition can be determined by other responses to 1D 04 n or 10 04 n Although the printer responds to Real Time commands when it is busy it will place them into the buffer behind any other data there and flush them out in the order in which they were received When the printer is busy due simply to buffer full that is it can t print data as fast as it can receive it
212. pter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Found New Hardware Wizard Driver Files Search Results ua wass The wizard has finished searching for driver files for your hardware device NS The wizard found a driver for the following device e Edgeport Serial Port 1 Port 123 Windows found a driver for this device To install the driver Windows found click Next gt e Nonetuuorkswin2000ionport inf lt Back Cancel Note Location of the IONetworks files on the CD ROM may very depending on the version of the CD that is being used Found New Hardware Wizard Driver Files Search Results ua wass The wizard has finished searching for driver files for your hardware device SY The wizard found a driver for the following device e Edgeport Serial Port 1 Port 123 Windows found a driver for this device To install the driver Windows found click Next 9 ionetworks win2000 ionport inf lt Back Cancel 32 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard Edgeport Serial Port Windows has finished installing the software for this device To close this wizard click Finish lt Back Cancel Checking the Installation You need to verify that the device drivers were installed correctly Windows 98 1 Open the Device Manager window as you did in Checking
213. q ER Taqi B tE DEE i ee a He 910 SUR IM EO ER RE EN F340 F3FF i La Tasa He AW SS EE DCN RC n K et 8 BHSCK ES HORN S Site HR AST aa SRSESR SE sp SE LE Sie SHAE SOR UT HEURES EE OS EALE ET r aeta TRE EMES Bu BERRA E Rs ERUNT TH HAE Wha EEE RS HT USA AS EE RTRE R RAE F440 F4FF RE SSRN REN Eg lg Ee SH KOR KE PRE ae eee mee SA MN a IRT Nid et ee ea Bi Ee ins Ubi Pee eine F540 FSFF Sa aaa NER Se ak a A BA Dr GaSe LI BSE EXER RES ES Fes We WP EE FEE N SO EAS A AG ae RA AA ORA AS A OR RA LU D DOR DOREM ee ce it ERAN RR FeO RENS I A SE ROC UN MOORE MER ei f MEO dad eae WI ae L4 b d tek D WORSE RE EO E I UG E dE F640 F6FF PACEA TOR E RODA BIEL AETR E Ra RHSACEE s NIE INN HSE es ERAT A MAU EBSHIMATAMEA OH BAM AAG UF AE AZ Ee ITAA ANIE TED IE EET in Dare Ee Ga tena hae ee PEER Re ree F740 F7FF RES ie tae ESTE a Oa AH PULLS BE EE CN EH TEE SE PRISE ML ROTUR IDEE ST DEOR E SLE btt 4 SERERE ee November 2002 Appendix C 277 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix C Code Pare 950 Traditional Chinese Cont F840 F8FF FC40 FCFF 40 PAREMIA IRER ASERNE 40 50 FREE tii RTR E ES AS 50 GO MEANN NAE TC A 60 EDE IET sn PUDE i 90 90 AQ BIEBEOECHELGE AUC RCRN AO BO NIDEEE QU Sa Wa Si SS BO CO Ste i oS ee a 2 Ne Bh a ER BE RR Ze C0 D BMUEEEREERHORR EE 0 er EARR FO F940 FOFF FD40 FDFF 40 NER EXERCERE RETE 40 r MCE Spa 0 ie BROS MER A UC IEEE u 90 90
214. r LXXXXXXXXXU XXXXXXXXO CCCC CXXXXXXXXXL XXXXXXXXO CCCC XXXXXX If both of these searches fail to produce the check serial number extract the whole account number field from between the rightmost transit symbol and the rightmost on us symbol A three four or five digit number to the right of the rightmost transit symbol separated by a space or a dash from the rest of the account number is the check serial number tXXXXXXXXXt CCCC XXXXXXXXO UXXXXXXXXXlL CCCC XXXXXXXXO tXXXXXXXXXt CCCC XXXXXXXXO XX If all of these searches fail to produce the distinct check serial number and the check serial number field has been specified in the parsing parameter string options no check serial number will be returned If it is imbedded within the account number field it will be returned as part of that variable length field November 2002 197 7167 Owner s Manual 198 Chapter 6 Commands Exceptions Some banks print the check serial number in a location that cannot be electronically distinguished without specific exception information although it can be visually distinguished because it is repeated in the upper right corner of the check For these cases the printer can hold up to nine exceptions for specific banks in its non volatile memory NVRAM which is accessed by the read and write NVRAM commands The specific bank is picked out by its transit number and the firmware will look in the exception table for a transit number match bef
215. r MICR Media Requirements Appendix C Character Sets November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 1 About the 7167 Printer Chapter 1 About the 7167 Printer The 7167 printer is a fast quiet relatively small and very reliable multiple function printer It prints receipts validates and prints checks and prints on a variety of single or multiple part forms There is no journal as it is kept electronically by the host computer The industry standard RS 232C communication interface allows the 7167 to be connected to any host computer that uses RS 232C or USB communication interface With thermal printing technology on the more frequently used receipt station there is no ribbon cassette to change and paper loading is extremely simple Printing on single or multiple part forms validating checks and printing checks is also easy in the accommodating slip station An additional option is the Magnetic Ink Character Recognition MICR check reader with parsing which reads account numbers on checks for easy verification An extended slip table is available for handling large forms and is standard with the MICR option Features and Options The 7167 printer comes with several features and options November 2002 1 7167 Owner s Manual Receipt Station Slip Station Chapter 1 About the 7167 Printer Thermal printing Standard pitch host selectable 15 2 characters per inch 44 columns Compressed pitch host selectable 1
216. r Recognition check reader does not read or misreads checks 51 What to Do Open the slip cover and clean the MICR read head with cotton swabs and isopropyl alcohol November 2002 Chapter 3 Solving Problems Where to Go See Adjusting the MICR Check Reader in chapter 4 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 3 Solving Problems Other Serious Problems The following problems all need to be corrected by a qualified service representative See the next section Contacting a Service Representative MICR check reader not operating properly Forms not feeding into the slip forms area properly Missing dots in slip or forms printing Printer will not cycle or stop when required llegible characters Paper will not feed Knife will not cycle or cut Platen will not open or close Printer will not communicate with Host Contacting a Service Representative For serious problems such as the printer not printing not communicating with the host computer or not turning on contact your NCR authorized service organization to arrange for a service call In addition to the service manual listed below other service related materials may be available Contact your NCR authorized service representative to obtain the service manual 7167 Thermal Receipt and Impact Slip Printer Service Manual B005 000 1407 includes the Troubleshooting Guide and the Preventative Maintenance Guide November 2002 52 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics
217. r buffer If a Batch Status Command remained in the buffer during this busy condition it would not be processed In fact no Batch Commands are processed while the printer is in this state Real Time Commands These commands are sent to the printer and are NOT stored in the printer s buffer Instead they are acted on immediately regardless of the printer s BUSY status and their response if any is returned to the application This gives the application the ability to query the printer when it is in a busy state in order to correct whatever fault has occurred Auto Status Back This mechanism allows the application developer to program the printer to automatically respond with a four byte status when certain conditions in the printer change Please see the subsequent sections for a more detailed description of these status commands At the end of this Status Commands section is a page entitled Recognizing Data from the Printer This describes how to interpret what command or setting in the case of Auto Status Back triggered a response from the printer Batch Mode For RS 232C printers these commands enable the printer to communicate with the host computer following the selected handshaking protocol either DTR DSR or XON XOFF They are stored in the printer s data buffer as they are received and are handled by the firmware in the order in which they are received When a fault occurs the printer will go busy at the RS 232C interface
218. r Canadian checks eliminate the dash and store the eight numerics The next three words are used as six individual bytes to tell the firmware how to interpret the MICR characters that fall to the right of the rightmost transit symbol Each of the six bytes is positional and consists of two parts character type and number The three high order bits of each byte mark the character type The characters can be marked in three ways check serial character account character or skip this character or symbol The five low order bits of each byte contain the number of characters of that type to extract Most exceptions will not need to use all six bytes in that case clear the unused bytes to zero November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Bits within Byte 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 check serial character string 0 0 1 n n n n n account character string 0 1 0n nn n n character string to ignore 1 0 On nn n n Example 1 t123456780t123498765432100 1234 is the check serial 9876543210 is the account To load the second table entry which starts at word 25 the transit number 123456780 would be stored in the first two words of its table entry using this string of commands Ox1B 0x73 0x12 0x34 25 Ox1B 0x73 0x56 0x78 26 After the right transit symbol are immediately the four characters of the check serial followed immediately by the ten characters of the account number These would be bitwise encoded as 001 00100
219. r code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate Datascope Mode Datascope Mode allows the user to test the printer s communications When in Datascope Mode the printer receives all communications but instead of executing the commands it prints them out on receipt paper as hexadecimal numbers in the order received For example the ASCII character A is printed as the hexadecimal number 41 an so on To run the Datascope Mode 1 Enter the Configuration Menu See Configuring the Printer for instruction on how to enter the Configuration Menu 2 After you have enabled the Datascope Mode through the Configuration Menu exit the Configuration Menu 3 Runa transaction from the host computer All commands and data sent from the host computer will be printed as hexadecimal numbers as shown in the illustration 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 O X m3 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 ABCD po myo ao HE H o C io UA c p To exit the Datascope Mode 1 Enter the Configuration Menu again 2 Disable the Datascope Mode 3 Exit the Configuration Menu The printer is in Normal Mode and can communicate with the host computer Slip Test Mode To run the Slip Test Mode 1 Enable the Slip Test Mode through the Configuration Menu See Configuring the Printer for instructions on how to enter Configuration Menu Then exit the Configuration Menu 2 Inserta slip into the slip station 3 Push
220. r the option you want Save new parameters YES gt Long Click NO MODIFY gt Short Click Diagnostic Modes This function allows the user to put the printer into the following diagnostic modes OFF Normal Mode this is the normal operating mode of the printer Datascope Mode the receipt printer prints incoming commands and data in hexadecimal format Slip test Mode the slip printer prints two code pages Receipt Test Mode the receipt printer prints two code pages MICR Test Mode the receipt printer prints all characters recognized by the MICR Check Flip Test Mode the check flip mechanism will flip an inserted check Print Head Gap Adjustment Mode the slip printer prints several lines of rolling ascii even receipt cover is open The diagnostic modes are enabled or disabled by using the Configuration Menu See Configuration the Printer for instructions on how to enter the Configuration Menu Press the Paper Feed Button for the diagnostic mode you want SET DIAGNOSTICS MODE YES gt Long Click NO gt Short Click OFF Normal Mode gt 1 Click Data Scope Mode gt 2 Clicks Slip Test Mode gt 3 Clicks Receipt Test Mode gt 4 Clicks More Options gt 7 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWN At least 1 second to validate November 2002 60 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics MICR Test mode gt 1 Click Check Flip Test mode gt 2 Clicks Print Head Test Mode gt 3 Clicks Ente
221. r will misinterpret the DLE and execute a Clear Printer command Avoid this possibility by using the 1D 03 n sequence that is handled exactly the same as 10 05 n November 2002 169 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Real Time Printer Status Transmission Hexadecimal ASCII Decimal GS ENQ 1D 05 295 Transmits one byte status of the printer in real time Value of Byte Bit Status 0 Off On 1 Off On 2 Off On 3 Off On 4 Off On 5 Off On 6 Off On 7 On Example Hex 00 01 00 02 00 04 00 08 00 1 00 20 00 40 00 Cla cj OJN oje Q oje N a 64 Decimal Function Receipt paper adequate Receipt paper low Receipt paper adequate Receipt paper low Both receipt and cassette doors closed Receipt or cassette door open Not busy at the RS 232C interface Printer is busy at the RS 232C interface One or both cash drawers open Both cash drawers closed Paper present at both slip sensors Paper not present at one or both slip sensors No error condition Error condition exists in the printer Fixed to On MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H05 170 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Auto Status Back Commands Chapter 6 Commands Select or Cancel Automatic Status Back GSan ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Value of n 1D 61n 29 97 n Status of ASB Enables or disables automatic status back ASB and specifies the status items This c
222. r will store a null string and raw MICR data will be returned See examples of parsing Exceptions If no parameters are selected parsing is not performed 192 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Parsing Parameter String Options Variable Length Fields Variable Length Field Name Selector Comments Transit Number T Full 9 digit routing transit number Bank Number B Digits 4 8 of transit number Check Digit D Digit 9 of transit number Account Number A Check Serial Number C Separate from account number Amount This field may not be present or readable Variable Length Field Optional Modifiers Selector Comments Zero fill to length 0 ASCII zero preceding maximum length Maximum length nn 1 or 2 digit ASCII number Remove space dash X Replace space dash with 0 x Examples of Variable Length Field Format Specifications Account all characters in the field keep spaces and dashes A Account all characters in the field replace spaces and dashes xA Account maximum 12 characters keep spaces and dashes 12A Account always 12 characters zero filled remove spaces and 012XA dashes Other Parameters Error Number E One Digit Returned 0 Read OK 1 Read error bad character empty field invalid length check digit invalid Status S Two Digits Returned 00 No error 01 No MICR data 09 Mexican check 08 Canadian check 05 Error in transit number 07 Error in account number 04 Error in check
223. ransaction some credit card transactions may be printed on the receipt station and not require any forms Multiple part forms such as credit transactions or merchandise returns Electronic funds transfers Check printing printing the date payee and amount on the check face Check endorsement Although the illustration on the facing page shows a check being inserted into the printer the instructions apply to any type of form The 7167 can print on forms up to five parts thick See Ordering Forms in chapter 1 for more information about the type of forms that can be used 1 46 Insert the form or check check shown in the illustration from the front and place it on the slip table top first and with the print side up If the form is extra long you may need to insert it from the side Slide the form or check to the right until it lines up against the slip guide If the form is extra long you need to slide it over the form stop to disengage it In this situation use the mark that is located on the slip door to align the form for printing in the proper location on the form Slide the form or check toward the back of the printer until it contacts the form stop it won t be able to go any further Or align the form or check with the mark on the slip door The green LED on the slip table turns on when the form or check is properly inserted the form has to cover two sensors on the slip table Follow the instructions from the h
224. ransferred from cold to warm areas after shipment The printer s design permits operation after drying out and stabilizing at room temperature November 2002 213 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix A Specifications 214 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Reliability Appendix A Specifications The numbers in the table refer to the Mean Cycle Between Failure MCBF for the items indicated Thermal Receipt Printer Impact Slip Printer Impact Print head Electronics Communications Card Control Panel Knife MICR Check Reader Flip Power Supply Flip Mechanism Dimensions and Weight Height Height with Cover Open Width Depth Depth with Extended Slip Table Weight 45 Million Lines 15 Million Lines 200 Million Characters 347 000 On time Hours 2 000 000 On Time Hours 2 100 000 On Time Hours 1 Million Cuts 200 000 Reads 200 000 Flips 200 000 On time Hours 200 000 Cycles 174 mm 6 9 Inches 296 mm 11 7 Inches 190 mm 7 5 Inches 262 mm 10 3 Inches 316 mm 12 5 Inches 4 50 Kg 10 0 Pounds Flip Model 4 25 Kg 9 4 Pounds Non Flip Model Density of Receipt Print Lines When the receipt station prints high density print lines graphics it automatically slows down to a rate slower than 902 lines per minute High density print lines are defined as lines with over 5076 of the dots printing on the line there are 576 total dot columns on the print station Duty Cycle Restrictions Printing Sol
225. re 48 level 0 paper jam 48 paper out printhead over under temperature startup Dimensions of printer 11 214 DIP switches See Switch settings Index Documentation ordering DOS sending commands Dot patterns of characters 216 Double wide characters dot patterns 218 DTR DSR protocol Duty cycle limitations 214 FE Emulation software options Environmental conditions Errors See Problems Features i Flash download commands 213 Flash download commands 213 Forms ordering 6 printing Graphics commands 142 Graphics commands 142 C H Hardware options 67 Horizontal positioning commands 114 I Installation choosing location connecting cables loading paper 40 removing packing material 10 setting switches turning on the printer Interface See RS 232C interface K Knife failure of setting 68 November 2002 Index 2 7167 Owner s Manual L LED green blinking fast what to do 48 LED green blinking slow what to do 148 LED green does not come on what to do 147 LED slip table does not come on what to do o Level 0 diagnostics Levelh diagnostics asian mode 66 carriage return usage 69 check flip option check flip test modes 63 color paper option 60 69 communication interface modes configuring the printer datascope modes 61 default code page default lines per inch diagnostic
226. read tally to 0 A 8F 143 MICR read tally Return MICR read tally returns 10 bytes E 90 144 Hours on tally Write to NVRAM 8 digit ASCII numeric max 99 999 999 91 145 Hours on tally Write to NVRAM and print on receipt to verify 92 146 Hours on tally Clear Hours on tally to 0 93 147 Hours on tally Return Hours on tally returns 10 bytes 97 151 Boot firmware Return Boot firmware version returns 6 version bytes A3 163 Flash firmware Return Flash firmware version returns 6 version bytes A4 164 Flash cycles tally Write to NVRAM 8 digit ASCII numeric max 99 999 999 N A5 165 Flash cycles tally Write to NVRAM and print on receipt to verify a A6 166 Flash cycles tally Clear Flash cycles cut tally to 0 November 2002 157 7167 Owner s Manual 158 Chapter 6 Commands Value of n Remote Diagnostic Item Function ASC Hex Dec 9 A7 167 Flash cycles tally Return Flash cycles cut tally returns 10 bytes A8 168 Knife jams tally Write to NVRAM 8 digit ASCII numeric max 99 999 999 r A9 169 Knife jams tally Write to NVRAM and print on receipt to verify 1 AA 170 Knife jams tally Clear Knife jams tally to 0 AB 171 Knife jams tally Return Knife jams tally returns 10 bytes Ya AC 172 Cover openings Write to NVRAM tally 8 digit ASCII numeric max 99 999 999 i AD 173 Cover openings Write to NVRAM and print on r
227. rent print directions can be developed in the printer s page buffer before being printed by the Eject Slip command 0C Defaults equal an origin of 0 0 and a size of 576x576 This command is allowed in any mode Formulas The starting position of the print area is the upper left of the area to be printed x0 y0 The length of the area to be printed in the y direction is set to dy inches The length of the area to be printed in the x direction is set to dx inches Use the equations to determine the Value of x0 y0 dx and dy See the illustration for a graphic representation of the printing area For more information about the fundamental calculation pitch see the Set Fundamental Calculation Pitch command 1D 50 x0 n1 12 x 256 x horizontal direction of the fundamental calculation pitch y0 n3 n4 x 256 x vertical direction of the fundamental calculation pitch dx n5 n6 x 256 x horizontal direction of the fundamental calculation pitch dy n7 n8 x 256 x vertical direction of the fundamental calculation pitch Keep the following notes in mind for this command The fundamental calculation pitch depends on the vertical or horizontal direction The maximum printable area in the x direction is 576 203 inches o NO oO F ODN The maximum printable area in the y direction is 2000 203 inches November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands First the printer must be set to page mode
228. rferences caused by such unauthorized modification substitution or attachment will be the responsibility of the user Industry Canada IC Radio Frequency Interference Statement This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada Quick Reference This Quick Reference will direct you to key areas of the Service Manual For a complete listing of topics consult the Table of Contents or the Index Setting Up the Printer page 9 Basic requirements for unpacking and installation connecting the printer turning it on and running the print test page 53 Procedures for setting up the printer for items such as communications diagnostics and other printer options Printer Commantds page 73 Printer firmware commands How to Use this Book Use this book as a general and technical reference manual and as a guide when replacing parts on the printer The service guide is intended as a guide for service representatives field engineers and those who will be installing and learning about the 7167 printer It can also be used as a reference for service courses See the Quick Reference page the Contents or the Index for detailed listings of wha
229. ric 00010000 max 99 999 999 To set receipt lines tally to 10 000 81 129 Receipt lines tally Write to NVRAM and print on receipt to verify Example send 12 bytes to printer GS I 00010000 This will print on receipt Receipt tally written 10 000 82 130 Receipt lines tally Clear receipt lines tally to 0 83 131 Receipt lines tally Return receipt lines tally preceded by n to identify Printer returns 10 bytes in above example 00010000 lt CR gt November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Value of n Remote Diagnostic Item Function ASC Hex Dec a 84 132 Knife cut tally Write to NVRAM 8 digit ASCII numeric max 99 999 999 a 85 133 Knife cut tally Write to NVRAM and print on receipt to verify a 86 134 Knife cut tally Clear knife cut tally to 0 87 135 Knife cut tally Return knife cut tally returns 10 bytes 88 136 Slip character tally Write to NVRAM 8 digit ASCII numeric max 99 999 999 89 137 Slip character tally Write to NVRAM and print on receipt to verify 8A 1138 Slip character tally Clear slip character tally to 0 I 8B 139 Slip character tally Return slip character tally returns 10 bytes i 8C 140 MICR read tally Write to NVRAM 8 digit ASCII numeric max 99 999 999 i 8D 141 MICR read tally Write to NVRAM and print on receipt to verify A 8E 142 MICR read tally Clear MICR
230. rint Data in Page Mode 182 1B 4C Select Page Mode 183 1B 53 Select Standard Mode 184 1B 54 n Select Print Direction in Page Mode 185 1B 57 n1 n2 n8 Set printing Area in Page Mode 186 1D 24 nL nH Set Absolute Vertical Print Position in Page Mode 187 1D5CnLnH Set Relative Vertical Print Position in Page Mode 188 Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 1D3A Start or End Macro Definition 189 1D5Ertm Execute Macro 190 MICR Reading Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 1B7701 Read MICR Data and Transmit 191 1B 77 52 Reread MICR Data 191 Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 1B 77 50 Define Parsing Format Save in NVRAM 192 1B 77 70 Define Parsing Format Do Not Save Permanently 192 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Check Flip Command Chapter 6 Commands Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 1B 77 46 Check Flip Command 200 User Data Storage Commands Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 1B 27 m addr d1 dm Write to User Data Storage 200 1B 34 m addr Read from User Data Storage 201 1B 6A k Read from Non Volatile Memory 202 1B 73 n1 n2 k Write to Non Volatile Memory NVRAM 202 1D 22n Select Memory Type SRAM Flash Where to 203 Save Logos or User Defined Fonts 1D 22 55 n1 n2 Flash Allocation 204 1D 40 n Erase User Flash Sector 205 IF 11 mn mn
231. rrect settings If you need assistance contact a service representative See Contacting a Service Representative in chapter 3 Printer Configuration Printers are generally shipped with all appropriate configuration settings pre set at the factory The only time the user should need to change the printer configuration is if a new option is installed or the firmware is changed It is also possible the user may need to run certain tests using the Configuration Menu The user configures the printer using a convenient Configuration Menu that is printed on receipt paper The Configuration Menu prints instructions and setting options interactively as the user goes through the configuration process The following functions and parameters can be changed with the scrolling Configuration Menu Configuring the Printer Communication Interface Interface Type Baud Rate Number of Data Bits Number of Stop Bits Parity Flow Control Data Reception Errors Receive Buffer Setting Diagnostic Modes Off Normal Mode Datascope Mode Slip Test Mode Receipt Test Mode MICR Test Mode Check Flip Test Mode Print Head Gap Adjust Test Mode November 2002 54 7167 Owner s Manual Setting Emulation Software Options Emulation Printer ID Default Lines Per Inch Carriage Return Usage Asian Mode Slip Print Width Receipt Synchronization Setting Hardware Options Print Density Maximum Power Option Paper Low Sensor Paper Width Knife Options
232. s November 2002 21 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer 6 Select RS232 USB 7 Skip through the parameters with short clicks until Set Flow Control Method is displayed 8 Follow the instructions to select either XON OFF or DTR DSR then skip the remaining communications parameters 9 When you have finished set DIP switch 1 to Off down 10 Reset the printer The printer resets with the new selection You can verify the new setting by pressing the Paper Feed button to print out a diagnostics form or by holding the Paper Feed button while closing the Receipt Cover 22 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Installing the USB Printer Drivers Windows NT users need to run Service Pak 3 or higher for a successful installation and should exit all Windows programs before starting 1 Verify that the printer is plugged in and the power is on 2 The installation varies depending on the operating system Windows 98 Follow the on screen instructions The printer beeps when the USB device is recognized Go to the location where you downloaded the drivers and double click the file Add New Hardware Wizard November 2002 23 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 2 Setting Up and Using the Printer Add New Hardware Wizard What do you want Windows to do z2
233. s 220 Receipt test modes setting Reliability 214 Removing packing material 10 ul Repacking printer Reset Ribbon cassette changing ordering Rotated characters dot patterns 219 Rotated printing summary ir RS 2 2 EM 58 RS 232 interface settings s RS 232C interface 73 p cash drawer connector communication connector DTR DSR protocol 74 parameters setting extra options technical specifications 74 November 2002 Index 4 7167 Owner s Manual XON XOFF protocol 74 S Setting switches 13 RS 232C parameters 78 Setup mode See Level 1 diagnostics Slip station character dot patterns 217 print zones 221 Slip test modes setting Specifications 211 RS 232C interface 74 Speed 73 Standard pitch dot patterns 217 Supplies cash drawer 7 communication cables 7 forms 6 paper 5 power d aH power supply ribbon cassette shipped separately Switch settings 15 Switch Settings RS 232C parameters 78 Index Technical specifications RS 232C interface 74 Thermal paper ordering requirements suppliers Thermal printhead See Printhead cleaning 8 print density 214 Timing 73 Troubleshooting See Problems Turning on the printer 39 U User data storage commands 00 User data storage Baa Using real time commands 163 V Vertical Positioning Commands 105 ae MAT Weight of printer 214 X XON XO
234. s or 1 8 mm n 203 inch for receipt or n 8 5 mm n 216 inch for slip Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H68 amp Chr n 176 November 2002 Chapter 6 Commands 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Print Bar Code First Variation Second Variation ASCII GS km d1 dk NUL or GSkmnd1 dn Hexadecimal 1D 6B m d1 dk 00 or 1D 6B mn d1 dn Decimal 29107 m d1 dk 0 or 29107 mn d1 dn 0 End of command Values First Variation String terminated with NUL Character m 0 6 10 d 32 126 see the table n 1 255 see the table Selects the bar code type and prints a bar code for the ASCII characters entered If the width of the bar code exceeds one line the barcode is not printed There are two variations to this command The first variation uses a NUL character to terminate the string the second uses a length byte at the beginning of the string to compensate for the Code 128 bar code which can accept a NUL character as part of the data With the second variation the length of byte is specified at the beginning of the string Fixed length codes can be aligned left center or right using the Align Positions command 1B 61 Variable length codes are always center aligned in 7156 Emulation This function is applicable to the receipt station only Barcodes on the slip station are always right justified The check digit is calculated for UPC and JAN EAN codes if it is not sent from the host
235. sh CRC ASCII GSSI Hexadecimal 1D OF Decimal 2915 Returns the CRC calculated over the Flash firmware code space The format of the response is ACK low byte high byte Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp HOF Erase Selected Flash Sector ASCII GSDLEn Hexadecimal 1D10n Decimal 2916n Value and Range ofn 0 7 512K bytes Flash 0 15 1M bytes Flash 0 31 2M bytes Flash Erases the previously selected sector The printer transmits ACK when the sector has been erased If the previous sector is not successfully erased or if no sector was selected the printer transmits NAK Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H10 amp Chr n Exceptions Available only in Download Mode November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Download to Active Flash Sector ASCII GS DC1 al ah cl ch d1 dn Hexadecimal 1D 11 al ah cl ch d1 dn Decimal 2917 al ah cl ch d1 dn Value of al low byte of the address Value of ah high byte of the address Value of cl low byte of the count Value of ch high byte of the count Value of d data bytes from 1 ton Contains a start address ah 256 al and count ch 256 cl of binary bytes to load into the selected sector followed by that many bytes The start address is relative to the start of the sector Addresses run from 0 to 64K The printer may return one of several responses ACK means that the data was written correctl
236. sh Download Commands These commands are used to load firmware into the printer The commands are listed in numerical order according to their hexadecimal codes Each command is described and the hexadecimal decimal and ASCII codes are listed There are three ways to enter the Download Mode 1 Powering the printer up with DIP Switch 2 up 2 While the printer is running normally use the command Switch to Flash Download Mode to leave normal operation and enter the Download Mode 3 Ifthe Flash if found corrupted during Level 0 diagnostics the Download Mode is automatically entered after the printer has reset The printer never goes directly from the Download Mode to normal printer operation To return to normal printer operation either the operator must turn the power off and then on to reboot or the application must send a command to cancel Download Mode and reboot Switch to Flash Download Mode ASCII ESC Hexadecimal 1B5B 7D Decimal 2791125 Puts the printer in Flash Download Mode in preparation to receive commands controlling the downloading of objects into Flash Memory When this command is received the printer leaves normal operation and can no longer print transactions until the Reboot the Printer command 1D FF is received or the printer is rebooted This command does not affect the current communication parameters Once the printer is in Flash Download Mode this command is no longer available Example MSComm1 Ou
237. t Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H64 amp Chr n Print and Reverse Feed n Lines ASCII ESCen Hexadecimal 1B65n Decimal 271017 Value of n The number of lines on the slip station to be reverse fed Range of n 0 255 Prints one line from the buffer and reverse feeds the paper n lines on the slip station The receipt station cannot be reverse fed Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H65 amp Chr n November 2002 111 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Reverse Feed n Lines ASCII GSDC4n Hexadecimal 1D14n Decimal 2920n Range of 5 0 127 7156 Emulation Mode 0 255 7158 Native Mode or 7167 Native Mode Reverses the paper feed in the slip station by n lines at the current spacing The next character feed command returns the paper feed back to the normal feed direction This command is ignored if slip is not the selected station Current spacing is not a factor Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H14 amp Chr n Reverse Feed n Dots ASCII GSNAK n Hexadecimal 1D15n Decimal 2921n Value of n n dots at 1 72 inch Range of n 0 127 7156 Emulation Mode 0 255 7158 Native Mode or 7167 Native Mode Reverses the paper feed in the slip station by n dots at 1 72 inch NCR 7150 command This command is ignored if receipt station is selected Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H15 amp Chr n 112 November 2002
238. t is contained in this book Who Should Use this Book You must be a trained service representative to service the 7167 Thermal Receipt and Impact printer How to Obtain More Information For more information see the following documents 7167 Two Station POS Printer Service Manual B005 000 1407 7167 Two Station POS Printer Parts Identification Manual B005 000 1408 For this and additional copies of the Owner s Manual contact your sales representative Revision Record Issue Date Remarks A Mar 2002 First printing B May 2002 Update to reflect first production configuration vi 7167 Owner s Manual Contents Contents Quick Reference en a teneret tete ete Coe Ei upi ees ede e ced How to Use this Book estet ieee ice e ERE T HEY EUIR URN Who Should Use this Book pe How to Obtain More Information Revision Record i I HR ER eet per ENSE CCOTLe Ets reete enr rir aa uwaa yunkaqa a Fiere eree deut ree aen wayqkuy Chapter 1 About the 7167 Printer Features and Options cte tte eret e ees ee Slip St OO Receipt and Slip Print Stations essere General Features egeret eus etuer e dp iia tie Pearl Siero HH Thermal Print Head s rt rettet net eer EENAA EE Impact Print Head oannes mto mantenere rta e eq ttes Ordering Paper and Supplies essent Ordering Thermal Receipt Paper sss Ordering Ribbon Cassett
239. t to be used See Print Specifications for the character sets There are two codes for this command Both codes perform the same function Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H52 amp Chr n Related Information This command may also be known as Select Character Code Table Select Character Code Table See the previous command Select International Character Set Select or Cancel Unidirectional Printing Mode ASCI ESCUn Hexadecimal 1B55n Decimal 2785n Value of n 0 select bi directional 1 select unidirectional Default 0 bi directional Toggles between unidirectional and bi directional printing on the slip station Unidirectional printing increases column alignment and provides higher quality printing Printing is normally bi directional because of the faster speed Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H55 amp Chr n Select or Cancel 90 Degrees Clockwise Rotated Print ASCII ESC Vn Hexadecimal 1B56n Decimal 2786n Value of n 0 Cancel 1 Set Default 0 Cancel November 2002 135 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Rotates characters 90 degrees clockwise The command remains in effect until the printer is reset or the Clear Printer 0x10 command is received See Summary of Rotated Printing in this chapter Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H56 amp Chr n Select Print Color ASCII ESCrn Hexadecimal 1B72n Decimal 27
240. tal movement amount Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H24 amp Chr nL amp Chr nH Exceptions This command is effective only in Page Mode If the nL nH x 256 x vertical or horizontal motion unit exceeds the specified printing area this command is ignored November 2002 187 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Set Relative Vertical Print Position in Page Mode ASCII GS nLnH Hexadecimal 1D5CnL nH Decimal 2992 nL nH Sets the relative vertical print starting position from the current position This command can also change the horizontal and vertical motion unit The unit of horizontal and vertical motion is specified by this command This command functions as follows depending on the print starting position set by Select Print Direction in Page Mode 1B 54 When the starting position is set to the upper left or lower left of the printing area the vertical motion unit y is used When the starting position is set to the upper right or lower left of the printing area the horizontal motion unit x is used Value The value for the horizontal and vertical movement cannot be less than the minimum horizontal movement amount and must be in even units of the minimum horizontal movement amount Formulas The distance from the current position is set to nL nH x 256 x vertical or horizontal motion unit inches The amount of movement is calculated only for the receipt Whe
241. ter definition The maximum number of user defined character is 100 Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1C amp Chr amp H32 amp Chr amp HF0 amp Chr amp H40 amp Chr d1 amp Chr dn Set Kanji character spacing ASCII FSSn1n2 Hexadecimal 1C 53 n1 n2 Decimal 28 83 n1 n2 Value of n1 Ignored 0 Value of 12 Character right side spacing dots 1 203 inch Default of n2 1 for 1 byte character 2 for 2 bytes character Sets the character right side spacing for characters in Asian character The underline is valid on the space set by this command ESC SP command is not valid for Asian character code pages Therefore this command is used to set the character right side spacing for characters in Asian code page Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1C amp Chr amp H53 amp Chr 0 amp Chr 100 November 2002 211 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands FS W Set quadruple mode ON OFF for Kanji ASCII FSWn Hexadecimal 1C57n Decimal 28 87 n Value of n The quadruple mode for Asian characters 0 Bit 0 Quadruple mode off 1 Bit 0 Quadruple mode on Default of n 0 Quadruple mode off Selects or cancels the quadruple mode for Asian characters FS and GS also have control over character size This latest received command is effective Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1C amp Chr amp H57 amp Chr n 212 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Fla
242. ter 6 Commands If the slip is selected this command will attempt recovery from a slip motor or flip jam by re homing the print head and waiting for a slip to be inserted before restarting the print Other errors associated with the slip such as cassette door open can be recovered from only by clearing the specific condition such as closing the cassette door n 2 Recovers from an error after clearing the receive and print buffers Print settings that are normally preserved from line to line such as character height and width are still preserved with this command This sequence is ignored except when the printer is busy due to an error condition If the slip was selected when the error occurred the receipt becomes selected when the buffers are cleared When printing on the slip is to continue the slip must be selected again The same error recovery possibilities exist as for n 1 n 3 Cancels the slip waiting status This sequence is ignored except when the printer is waiting for a slip to be inserted When slip waiting is canceled the receive and print buffers are cleared and the receipt is selected When printing on the slip is to continue the slip must be selected again Exampleusing the GS sequence MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H03 amp Chr n Exceptions The command is ignored if n is out of range An application using the DLE sequence must send ENQ within 100 milliseconds of DLE or the printe
243. ter to set itself to double wide mode 12 load the print buffer with ABC 41 42 43 and finally print 0A Again the communication link that the BASIC program outputs to must be matched to that of the printer RS 232C Interface The RS 232C interface uses either XON XOFF or DTR DSR protocol For XON XOFF a particular character is sent back and forth between the host and the printer to regulate the communication For DTR DSR changes in the DTR DSR signal coordinate the data flow The RS 232C version of the 7167 offers the standard options which are selectable in the Diagnostic mode See Diagnostics Communications Interface Settings later in this book Print Speed and Timing The fast speed of the printer requires the application to send data to the printer at least as fast as it is printed This application must also allow receipt lines to be buffered ahead at the printer so the printer can print each line immediately after the preceding line without stopping to wait for more data Ideally the application will send all the data for an entire receipt without pausing between characters or lines transmitted If the application sends data at 9600 baud and pauses between lines for as little as 50 milliseconds the printer will never be able to print at full speed But if the application sends data at 19 2 K baud and does not pause between lines the printer will be able to print at its full speed of 1020 lines minute The table s
244. termined in factory and should generally not be changed to avoid changing other functions TIE Jee Main Menu kkxxkkxxkkxy FEIT ITT I IRIE IE I RI RTE IR IR I Select a sub menu EXIT 1 Click Print Current Configuration 2 Clicks Set Communication Interface 3 Clicks Set Diagnostics Modes 4 Clicks Set Emulation Software 5 Clicks Set Hardware Options 6 Clicks Set Default Code Page 7 Clicks Set EEPROM To Default 8 Clicks Enter code then hold Button DOWM at least 1 second to validate Important Ensure that the configuration settings match your host computer if not enter the Configuration Menu to make changes Configuration Menu and Print Test samples show approximately 60 of size November 2002 57 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics 4 Press the Paper Feed Button to make the selections The instructions indicate whether to select something with a short click a long click or a series of short clicks Indicate Yes with a long click No with a short click Press and hold the Paper Feed Button for at least one second for a long click Press the Paper Feed Button quickly for a short click 5 When finished set DIP Switch 1 to Off and reset printer Communication Interface Modes The Configuration Menu gives the user the option of setting the printer to use an RS 232C serial port See Configuring the Printer for instructions on how to enter the Configuration Menu RS 232C I
245. ters must conform to MICR standards as defined in ANSI ABA X9 13 X9 18 and 9 27 as well ISO 1004 Forms Checks must be flat and void of curls folds or wrinkles expecially at the leading edges of the checks Paper jams and MICR read errors will occur if check have paper clips and staples Also damage to the printer mechanism may occur to printer components such as the MICR read head paper feed rollers impact print head etc When inserting the check into the printer and the the printer feed rolls begin to feed the check release the check immediately Skewing of the check will occur which will cause check jams and MICR read errors 19 mm 0 7477 8 0 mm 0 315 lt 6mm 0 236 Paper Feed Direction Edge of Check Holes and Low Reflection Not Permitted in these areas November 2002 224 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix C Character Sets The following pages show the character sets PC Code Page 437 USEnglish PC Code Page 850 Multilingual PC Code Page 852 Slavic PC Code Page 860 Portuguese PC Code Page 862 Hebrew PC Code Page 863 French Canadian PC Code Page 864 Arabic PC Code Page 865 Nordic PC Code Page 866 Cyrillic PC Code Page 1252 Windows Latin 1 PC Code Page Katakana PC Code Page 874 Thai Space Page Code Page 932 Code Page 936 Code Page 949 Code Page 950 November 2002 Appendix C 225 Appendix C 7167 Owner s Manual Code Page 950 C
246. th receipt and cassette doors closed Receipt or cassette door open Paper Feed Button is not pressed Paper Feed Button is pressed Fixed to On Printing not stopped due to paper condition Printing stopped due to paper condition No error condition Error condition exists in the printer Fixed to Off November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual 3 Transmit Error Status Bit 7 Status Off Off Hex 00 02 00 04 00 08 10 00 20 00 40 00 Decimal oo oje COINIO 0 Chapter 6 Commands Function Fixed to Off Fixed to On No slip motor or flip jam Slip motor or flip jam occurred No knife error Knife error occurred Fixed to On No unrecoverable error Unrecoverable error occurred Thermal print head temp power supply voltage are in range Thermal print head temp power supply voltage are out of range Fixed to Off 4 Transmit Receipt Paper Status Bit Status Off On Off On Hex 00 02 00 04 00 08 10 00 20 00 40 00 Decimal oje O N O Function Fixed to Off Fixed to On Receipt paper adequate Receipt paper low Receipt paper adequate Receipt paper low Fixed to On Receipt paper present Receipt paper exhausted Receipt paper present Receipt paper exhausted Fixed to Off November 2002 167 7167 Owner s Manual 168 Chapter 6 Commands 5 Transmit Slip Paper Status Bit Status Hex Decimal Function 0 Off 00 0 Fixed to Off 1 On 02 2 Fixed to On 2 Of
247. then the following command should be sent Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H57 amp Chr amp H40 amp Chr amp H0 amp Chr amp H40 amp Chr amp H0 amp Chr amp H40 amp Chr amp H1 amp Chr amp H40 amp Chr amp H1 Exception This command is effective only in Page Mode Set Absolute Vertical Print Position in Page Mode ASCII GS nLnH Hexadecimal 1D24nLnH Decimal 2936 rL rH Formulas nL nH X 256 x vertical or horizontal motion unit inches Sets the absolute vertical print starting position for buffer character data in Page Mode The vertical or horizontal motion unit for the paper roll is used and the horizontal starting buffer position does not move The reference starting position is set by Select Print Direction in Page Mode 1B 54 This sets the absolute position in the vertical direction when the starting position is set to the upper left or lower right and sets the absolute position in the horizontal direction when the starting position is set to the upper right or lower left The horizontal and vertical motion unit are specified by the Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units 1D 50 command The Set Horizontal and Vertical Minimum Motion Units 1D 50 command can be used to change the horizontal and vertical motion unit However the value cannot be less than the minimum horizontal movement amount and it must be in even units of the minimum horizon
248. this command e g incompatible commands November 2002 89 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Related Describes related information for this command e g bit Information information Printer Function Commands The printer function commands control the following basic printer functions and are described in order of their hexadecimal codes 90 1 Station Select 2 Platen Control 3 Resetting the printer 4 Cutting the paper 5 Opening the cash drawers Clear Printer ASCII DLE Hexadecimal 10 Decimal 16 Clears the print line buffer without printing and sets the printer to the following condition 1 Receipt station is selected 2 Double Wide command 0x12 is cancelled 3 Line Spacing Pitch and User Defined Character Sets are maintained at current selections RAM is not affected 4 Single Wide Single High Non Rotated and Left Aligned characters are set 5 Printer is restarted and error status is cleared if a fault condition existed 6 Printing position is set to column one 7 Slip platen is opened 8 Slip print head is homed 9 Knife is homed Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H10 Exceptions A DLE command followed by a hexadecimal 04 or 05 is interpreted as a real time command See Real Time commands November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Close Form ASCII DC1 Hexadecimal 11 Decimal 17 Closes the feed roller and platen and retracts the forms arm st
249. tput Chr amp H1B amp Chr amp H5B amp Chr amp H7D Request Printer ID ASCII GS NUL Hexadecimal 1D 00 Decimal 290 Returns ACK 06 hex 12 bytes ASCII string describing the Flash Memory Boot Sector Firmware part number Ex 189 1234567A Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H00 November 2002 213 7167 Owner s Manual 214 Chapter 6 Commands Return Segment Number Status of Flash Memory ASCII GSSOH Hexadecimal 1D01 Decimal 291 Returns the size of the Flash used There may be 8 16 or 32 sectors 64K each in Flash Memory This command assures that the firmware to be downloaded is the appropriate size for Flash Memory The value returned is the maximum sector number that can be accepted by the Select Sector to Download 1D 02 n command Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H01 Exceptions Available only in Download Mode Select Flash Memory Sector to Download ASCII GSSTX n Hexadecimal 1D02n Decimal 292n Value of n The Flash sector to which the next download operation applies Range of n 0 7 512K 0 15 1 mB 0 31 2 mB Selects the Flash sector nn for which the next download operation applies The values of the possible sector are restricted depending upon the Flash part type The printer transmits an ACK if the sector number is acceptable or an NAK if the sector number is not acceptable Sector numbers start at 0 Example M
250. u Insert a check into the slip station See Verifying and Validating Checks section 4 The printer waits until a check is inserted and detected before the platen closes and the characters are read by the MICR check reader The decoded data is printed on receipt paper the platen is opened and the test is re started 5 The printed numbers should match the numbers on the check If the MICR check reader misreads a character the test prints question mark If the MICR check reader is unable to read any characters the test prints NO MICR DATA TO DECODE GOOD READ MICR Data 5001234UT33456789T 123 67 5 To exit the MICR Test Mode 1 Enter the Configuration Menu again 2 Disable the MICR Test Mode 3 Exit the Configuration Menu The printer is in the Normal Mode and can communicate with the host computer November 2002 62 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 4 Diagnostics Check Flip Test Mode To run the Check Flip Test Mode 1 3 4 Enable the Check Flip Test Mode through the Configuration Menu See Configuring the Printer for instruction on how to enter the Configuration Menu then exit the Configuration Menu Insert a check as if validating the check lengthwise and face down into the slip station See Verifying and Validating Checks section to insert check A check must be used if any other slip or form is inserted the printer will not conduct ENDORSE HERE DO NO
251. urn OD to signify the end of the data November 2002 155 7167 Owner s Manual 156 Chapter 6 Commands The command performs the remote diagnostic function specified by n as described in the following table Value of n Remote Diagnostic Item Function ASC Hex Dec Space 20 32 Serial Write to NVRAM 10 digit ASCII Example send 14 bytes to printer GS I 9 0x20 1234567890 21 33 Serial Write to NVRAM and print on receipt to 10 digit ASCII verify Example send 14 bytes to printer GS I 9 1 1234567890 This will print on receipt Serial written 1234567890 4 22 34 Serial Not available cannot clear Serial item 23 35 Serial Return Serial preceded by n to identify Printer returns 12 bytes in above example 1234567890 lt CR gt 24 36 Class model Write to NVRAM 15 digit ASCII 25 37 Class model Write to NVRAM and print on receipt to verify I 27 39 Class model Return Class model returns 17 bytes 2B 43 Boot firmware part Return Boot firmware part returns 14 12 digit ASCII bytes 2F 47 Boot firmware Return Boot firmware CRC returns 6 CRC 4 digit ASCII bytes 3 33 51 Flash firmware part Return Flash firmware part returns 14 12 digit ASCII bytes 7 37 55 Flash firmware Return Flash firmware CRC returns 6 CRC 4 digit ASCII bytes 80 128 Receipt lines tally Write to NVRAM 8 digit ASCII Example send 12 bytes to printer GS I nume
252. wo times width 20 32 3 three times width 30 48 4 four times width 40 64 5 five times width 50 80 6 six times width 60 96 7 seven times width 70 112 8 eight times width November 2002 137 7167 Owner s Manual 138 Chapter 6 Commands Character Height Selection Hex Decimal Height 00 0 1 normal 01 1 2 two times height 02 2 3 three times height 03 3 4 four times height 04 4 5 five times height 05 5 6 six times height 06 6 7 seven times height 07 7 8 eight times height This command is effective for all characters except for HRI characters In Standard Mode the vertical direction is the paper feed direction and the horizontal direction is perpendicular to the paper feed direction However when character orientation changes in 90 degree clockwise rotation mode the relationship between vertical and horizontal directions is reversed In Page Mode vertical and horizontal directions are based on the character orientation When characters are enlarged with different sizes on one line all the characters on the line are aligned at the baseline The Select Print Mode 1B 21 n command can also select or cancel double width and double height modes However the setting of the last received command is effective Example MSComm1 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp H21 amp Chr n Exceptions If n is out of the defined range this command is ignored Th
253. y and the host should transmit the next block NAK means that for some reason the data was not written correctly This could mean that communications failed or that the write to Flash failed The alternatives seem to be to retry the block or halt loading and assume a hardware failure Value of n for number of data bytes Range of Address al ah Range of Count cl ch ch 256 cl 2000 FFFF hexadecimal 0001 0400 hexadecimal Range Addresses run from 0 to 64K Related Information Available only in Download Mode November 2002 217 7167 Owner s Manual Chapter 6 Commands Reboot the Printer ASCII GS SPACE Hexadecimal 1D FF Decimal 29 255 Ends the load process and reboots the printer Before executing this command the printer should have firmware loaded and external switches set to the runtime settings Application software for downloading should prompt the user to set the external switches and confirm before sending this command If the downloading was started from a diagnostic the reboot will cause the printer to reenter download state unless the external switches are changed Example MSComm41 Output Chr amp H1D amp Chr amp HFF 218 November 2002 7167 Owner s Manual Appendix A Specifications Appendix A Specifications Printing Specifications Print head Character Cell Character Size Character Spacing Character Pitch Columns maximum Print Mode Resident Fonts Speed
254. zed Mode 131 1B 47 Select Double Strike 7156 Emulation Mode 132 1B 47 n Select Double Strike 7158 7167 Native Modes 132 1B 48 Cancel Double Strike 133 1B 49 n Select or Cancel Italic Print 133 1B 52 n Select International Character Set 134 1B55n Select or Cancel Unidirectional Printing Mode 135 1B 56 n Select or Cancel 90 Degrees Clockwise Rotated 135 Print 1B72n Select Print Color 136 1B74n Select International Character Set 134 1B7Bn Select or Cancel Upside Down Printing Mode 136 1D21n Select Character Size 137 1D 42n Select or Cancel White Black Reverse Print 138 Mode 1F 05n Select Superscript or Subscript Modes 139 November 2002 81 7167 Owner s Manual Graphics Commands Chapter 6 Commands Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 1B bmp Download BMP Logo 142 1B 2A mni1n2d1 dn Select Bit Image Mode 143 1B 4C n1 n2 d1 dn Select Double Density Graphics in 7156 146 Emulation Mode 1B 59 n1 n2 d1 dn Select Double Density Graphics 146 1D23n Select Current Logo Downloaded Bit Image 146 1D 2A n1 n2 d1 dn Define Downloaded Bit Image 147 1D 2F m Print Downloaded Bit Image 149 1F04n Convert 6 Dots mm Bitmap to 8 Dots mm 150 Bitmap Status Commands Hexadecimal Command Code and Operands Command Page 1B750 Transmit Peripheral Device Status 152 1B 76 Transmit Printer Status 152 1D49n Transmit Printer ID 153 1D 49

Owner`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents